MECHANICAL CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15 CC... · 2015-04-13 · CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226 DIVISION 15 STAMP COVER

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

DIVISION 15 STAMP COVER PAGE

1339

MECHANICAL CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 15

3-26-2015

The Engineer's seal and signature affixed hereon IS all inclusive for the full content of1hls portion of the document

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX Y AKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQillREMENTS

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15000 - 1

A. Refer to Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and Division I of these specifications, which govern work under Division 15. Refer to other sections of these specifICations for additional related requirements.

1.2 SCOPE OF REQUIREMENTS

A. The work covered by Division 15 ofthe specifications shall include but not limited to:

I. Furnishing all materials and supplying all labor, equipment, and services to install the complete mechanical systems as shown on the accompanying drawings and specified herein.

1.3 ALTERNATES (REFER TO SECTION 01030)

A. The bid price for each alternate shall include a complete working mechanical system as described in the alternates, shown on the drawings, and indicated in these specifICations.

1.4 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

A. Mechanical work shall be in accordance with the following as adopted by the governing agencies, including amendments:

I. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 2. Applicable State and Local Codes and Ordinances 3. National Electrical Code 4. International Building Code-2012 5. International Fire Code-2012 6. International Mechanical Code-20 12 7. Uniform Plumbing Code-2012 8. Washington State Energy Code-2012 9. Washington State Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessel Code

B. Permits and inspections required fur the mechanical work on this project shall be obtained as part of the Division 15 scope of work:, and the cost for these permits and inspections shall be included in the Division 15 bid. All inspection certificates shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative prior to final acceptance of the work in accordance with the requirements of these specifications.

C. All costs levied by utility companies andlor governing agencies associated with gas and other utility connections shall be included in the Division 15 scope of work and shall be included in the Division 15 bid. This shall include but not limited to tap tees, service mains, meter and vault charges, valves, etc.

D. Work shall comply with all regulations associated with all applicable utilities.

1.5 INTENT AND INTERPRETATIONS

A. It is the intent of these plans and specifIcations to result in a complete and working mechanical installation in complete accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15000·2

B. The drawings and these specifications are intended to supplement each other. Any details contained in either the drawings or these specifications shall be included as if contained in both.

C. Items not speCifically mentioned in the specifications or noted on the drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation shall be included.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. The term "Acceptance", when used in Division 15, shall be defined as the Owner's assumption of ownership for part or all of the mechanical system. Acceptance of part or all of the mechanical system, when granted prior to completion of mechanical work and/or correction of defiCiencies, shall not relieve Division IS of any responsibility for completion of this work and/or correction of these deficiencies.

B. The term "Date of Acceptance", when used in Division 15, shall be the official date when Acceptance, as defined in these specifications, occurs. The Date of Acceptance shall be assumed to coincide with granting of Substantial Completion unless noted otherwise by the Owner's Representative. Deviation of the Date of Acceptance from Substantial Completion can assume to have occurred only when written documentation is provided by the Owner's Representative specifically indicating this separation and identi/ying an alternative designation for the Date of Acceptance.

C. The terms "The Contractor" or "This Contractor", when used in Division 15, shall be defined as the Contractor responsible for Division 15 work.

D. The term "Owner's Representative", when used in Division 15, shall refer to the Architect or his designated representative in accordance with the General Conditions.

E. The term "Provide" shall mean furnish and install.

F. The term "Mechanical", when used in Division 15, to distinguish a particular scope of work or portion of the documents, shall mean the Division 15 scope of work and Division 15 documents, respectively.

1.7 DRAWINGS

A. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Drawings shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will penni!.

B. Architectural and Structural drawings and specifications shall be considered part ofthis work insofar as they furnish information relating to design and construction of the building. These documents take precedence over mechanical drawings and specifications if any dimensional discrepancies exist.

C. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic only. Consequently, all required duct and pipe offsets are not indicated on the drawings. Offsets as required to meet the design intent of the drawings shall be provided under Division 15.

1.8 GUARANTEE (REFER TO SECTION 01740)

A. Provide in accordance with Section 01740 and the requirements of this section.

B. The Mechanical equipment, materials, and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year unless an individual item or specification is otherwise noted as longer. All defects in mechanical work

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PRO.IECT NO.lOI4.ll6

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15000 • 3

and/or equipment furnished under Division 15 that develop at any time during the one year guarantee period shall be corrected at no cost to the owner, including any expenses for cutting, patching, and repairing made necessary by corrections of unsatisfactory work andlor damage reSUlting from incorrect equipment operation.

C. The guarantee period shall begin upon the Date of Acceptance. When Acceptance is granted for portions of the Mechanical system at diffurent times, the guarantee for each portion of the Mechanical system shall begin upon Acceptance of that portion of the Mechanical system.

D. Permission to use the permanent Mechanical system for temporary heating during construction does not constitute acceptance. All product and system warranties shall be extended at nO cost to the Owner as required to maintain this one (I) year requirement from the Date of Acceptance if such permission is given.

I. Exception: Use of part or all of the Mechanical system prior to the Date of Acceptance, when initiated by the Owner, shall constitute Acceptance of the specific piece of equipment andlor portion of the system only when acknowledgement of Acceptance is noted in written authorization from the Owner as required in these specifications.

E. Equipment warranties in addition to this guarantee shall be provided in accordance with the table at the end of this section.

1.9 MECHANICAL COST BREAKDOWN (REFER TO SECTION 01027)

A. A breakdown of the Mechanical construction cost shall be furnished to the Owner's Representative within 30 days of Notice to Proceed, with separate costs for each of the items listed in the table at the end of this Section.

1.10 PAYMENT REQUESTS (REFER TO SECTION 01027)

A. Payment requests for materials and equipment will not be reviewed or approved until submittals and operation and maintenance data have been received and approved.

B. Payment requests for the Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) will not be reviewed or approved until submittals required under Section 15970 have been received. Once these submittals have been received, only payment requests for programming and submittals will be reviewed until all submittals required under Section 15970 have been reviewed and approved. Payment requests for materials andlor installation will not be reviewed prior to approval of all submittals required under Section 15970.

1.11 TEMPORARY HEATING (REFER TO SECTION 01500)

A. Temporary heating for the facility during the construction phase shall not be supplied by the permanent system installed under Division 15.

1. Exception: The Contractor shall obtain a letter of approval from the Owner stating that they understand equipment expected life may be shortened due to severe usage.

B. If the Contractor is given permission to use permanent systems for space heating during construction:

1339

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for pressure cleaning all coils and vacuum cleaning all ductwork prior to occupancy if deemed necessary by the Owner's Representative.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15000·4

2. Product warranties shall be extended as required to account for construction use. Warranty periods offered by equipment manufacturers andlor required by these specifications shall begin at the Date of Acceptance. If equipment manufacturers require that the warranty period begin with use of equipment during construction, the Contractor shall bear the expense of extending all such warranties to maintain the required warranty period beyond the Date of Acceptance.

3. Filters shall be installed meeting the requirements of the drawings and these specifications for the permanent system. Systems which have multiple stages of filtration shall have filters installed meeting the requirements of the drawings and these specifications for the first level of filtration. In addition to the requirements for the permanent system, filters provided during construction shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MER V) rating of 13 whether such a rating is required for the permanent system or not. New filters shall be installed prior to system balancing. Units shall not be operated without filters in place. Check and change filters at intervals sufficient to protect the Mechanical system.

4. Filter fabric shall be provided at all return grilles subject to airborne construction debris. Filter fabric shall be replaced at intervals sufficient to protect the Mechanical system. Filter fabric shall be removed prior to system balancing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERlALS - STANDARDS AND CODES

A. Materials used under this Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and of the latest and most current model line produced by the manufacturer. Outdated "new" equipment is not acceptable. Each item of equipment and material shall conform to the latest Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials and shall conform to any applicable standards of the United States Department of Commerce.

B. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to the Owner.

C. Motor efficiencies shall meet or exceed the requirements of the applicable energy code.

D. All electrically driven Or connected equipment shall be provided with UL or equivalent label andlor listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.

E. Equipment shall be UL listed as an assembly where listingflabeling program is available for that type of equipment.

F. All control panels shall be provided with UL or equivalent label andlor listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC and applicable local electrical codes.

G. Fuel fired equipment shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for use with the particular fuel type.

H. All pressure vessels and relief valves shall be furuished in accordance with applicable Washington State Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessel Laws.

1339


2.2 EQUIPMENTIMATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS


A. Throughout these specifications and drawings, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified or scheduled by manufactuJer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and cons\nJction and shall be the basis of design and the bid.

B. Substitutions will not be permitted without written approvaL (Refer to Section 01600.)

C. Where nvo or more manufacturer designations are listed in these specifications, choice will be optional with the Contractor except that where more than one manufacturer is listed and only one manufacturer's catalog number is specified or only one manufacturer scheduled on the drawings (basis of design), that standard of quality, dimensional characteristics, capacities, and construction shall be maintained by materials or equipment supplied by the other manufacturer(s).

D. Substituted equipment with efficiencies less than 95% of the basis of design efficiency shall not be considered equal to the basis of design.

E. If the Division 15 Contractor uses manufacturers other than the basis of design, the Contractor shall be responsible for:

1. Insuring the substituted item will fit the available space while allowing proper maintenance access

2. Any changes required by other Contractors caused by the substituted equipment 3. Changes in electrical requirements: See "Equipment Substitutions - Electrical

Characteristics" below 4. Changes in structural design due to weight differences

F. In the event other than specified equipment is used and will not fit job site conditions, this Contractor shall assume responsibility for replacement with items indicated as the basis of design.

2.3 EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. Products furnished other than the basis of design shall have similar electrical characteristics as the scheduled or specified equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for any electrical changes caused by products not in accordance with this requirement.

2.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW (REFER TO SECTION 01300)

A. Shop drawings, catalog information and material schedules shall be submitted for approval on all specified materials and equipment in Division 15 prior to ordering.

B. Provide specific wiring diagrams for all equipment requiring electrical or control wiring. Upon approval, copies of these diagrams shall be forwarded to pertinent contractors.

C. Furnish complete shop drawing/catalog data for equipment and materials to be used in the work for review. Allow sufficient time for developing shop drawings, processing and review time so that the installation will not be delayed.

D. Shop drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to submitting to Owner's Representative for approval. Submittals without such approval will be returned without review.

1339



E. Submit data in accordance witb Section 01300 and in accordance with this section. Data shall be black and white, on 81'tx 11 Inch or II x 17 inch, single, one-sided sheets suitable for copying. Diagrams and drawings larger than II x 17 inch shall be submitted in reproducible form. Drawings and catalog data must be clean, neat copies. fax material or otber poor quality copies will not be acceptable.

F. Where choices of options and accessories are available or specified, provide written description of what is to be furnished. If necessary, list page numbers where submitted items are described.

G. State sizes, capacities, brand names, motor horsepower, electrical characteristics, accessories, materials, gauges, dimensions, and other pertinent information.

H. Underline applicable data.

I. Ifmaterial or equipment is not as specified or submittal is not complete, it will be rejected. Only complete submittal including all applicable specification sections will be reviewed.

J. Catalog data or shop drawings for equipment which are noted as being reviewed shall not supersede Contract Documents.

K. Review comments shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Contract Documents unless attention has been called to such deviations in writing at time of submission, nor shall they relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors in items submitted.

L. Check work described by catalog data with Contract Documents for deviations and errors.

M. Provide index tabs for each specification section in same order and using same name as appears in the Specifications. Shop drawings and submittal informetion shall be provided for all required Division 15 equipment in a single submittal.

1. Exceptions:

a. EMCS submittals may be provided independently, but status of submittals shall be kept up to date in submittal table.

b. At the discretion of the Owner's Representative, partial project submittals may be allowed. In such a case, the first submittal shall be provided in a 3-ring binder per the requirements noted above with all applicable tabs and sufficient space for all project mechanical submittals.

N. All submittals and re"submittals as required shall be provided witb a cover page incorporating a Ishle of all items that will be submitted for tbe project. The appropriate box( es) shall be checked on each line item for all submittals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATIONS

A. Coordination of Division 15 equipment and systems to tbe available space, with other trades and to tbe access routes through the constmction shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of pipes and ducts as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines and avoid structural, electrical, pipe

1339

CAMPUS OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15000-7

and duct interferences whether or not indicated On Drawings. Furnish fittings, etc., as required to make these offsets, transitions and changes in direction at nO additional cost to the Owner.

C. Pipe and duct routing shall be coordinated and verified with all trades prior to fabrication and installation. Additional project costs resulting from failure to do so shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

D. Determine exact route and location of each pipe and duct and coordinate and obtain approval for changes from the layout indicated on the drawings with the Owner's Representative prior to fabrication.

E. Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of mechanical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Owner's Representative prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear.

F. All piping, wiring, equipment, ductwork, tubing, etc., shall be concealed within building construction unless otherwise noted, or in mechanical rooms.

G. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, unions, traps, trap primers, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels.

H. Existing Utilities and Piping

1. The locations of existing concealed lines and connection points have been indicated as closely as possible from available information. The Contractor shall assume that such connection points are within a 10 foot radius of the indicated location. Where connection points are not within this radius, the Contractor shall contact the Owner's Representative for a decision before proceeding or may proceed at his own expense.

2. Connection points to existing work shall be located and verified prior to starting new work. 3. Ptior to commencing any excavation or ditching activity, the Contractor shall verify the exact

location and inverts of all existing utilities and connection points in the area of his proposed excavation. Notify the Owner's Representative for further direction if actual inverts will not allow the proper installation of new work.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages which might be caused by his failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities.

3.2 SCHEDULING

A. It is understood that while drawings are to be followed as closely as circumstances permit, the Contractor shall be responsible for installation of systems according to the true intent and meaning of Contract Thlcuments. Anything not clear or in conflict will be explained by making application to Owner's Representative. Should conditions arise where certain changes would be advisable, secure approval from Owner's Representative for those changes before proceeding with work.

B. The contractor shall coordinate with the work of various trades when installing interrelated work. Before installation of mechanical items, proper provisions shall be made to avoid interferences. Changes required in work specified in Division 15 caused by neglect to do so shall be made at no cost to Owner.

C. Inserts and supports required by Division 15 shall be furnished and installed unless otherwise noted. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are an integral part of other Divisions of the Work to those involved in sufficient time to be built into construction as the Work proceeds. Locate

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·22<>


these items and see that they are properly installed. Expense resulting from improper location or installation of items above shall be borne under Division 15.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Refer to section 01045 for supplemental requirements.

B. All cutting and patching of new and existing construction required for the installation of systems and equipment specified in Division 15 shall be the responsibility of the Division 15 Contractor. All cutting shall be accomplished with masonry saws, drills or similar equipment to provide neat uniform openings.

C. Walls, floors, ceilings and roof shall be patched and repaired with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface fmishes shall exactly match existing fmishes of same materials. All patching shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative.

D. All cutting and patching made necessary to repair defective equipment, defective workmanship or be neglect of this Contractor to properly anticipate his requirements shaH be included in Division 15.

E. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses or other structural members without the Owner Representative's written approval.

F. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavement, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work specified or indicated under Division 15 is responsibility of Division 15.

3.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (REFER TO SECTION 01500)

A. Follow manufacturer's directions in delivery, storage, protection, and installation of equipment and materials.

B. Promptly notifY Owner's Representative in writing of conflicts between requirements of Contract Documents and Manufacturer's dircctions and obtain written instructions from Owner's Representative before proceeding with work. The Contractor shall bear expenses arising from correcting deficiencies of work that do not comply with manufacturer's directions or such written instructions from Owner's Representative.

C. Deliver equipment and material to site and tightly cover and protect against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical i'liury but have readily accessible for inspection. Store items subject to moisture damage (such as controls) in a dry, heated space.

D. NotifY Owner of equipment delivery dates twenty-four (24) hours in advance of delivery.

E. TIle Contractor shall be responsible for protection of equipment furnished in Division 15 from vandalism and weather during all phases of construction. Damaged equipment shall be restored to like new condition or replaced at the Contractor's expense.

F. Ductwork shall be stored on pallets off of grade. Internally lined ductwork and air handling equipment shall be kept dry. Internal insulation that has been allowed to become wet will be rejected. Air handling equipment that has been allowed to become wet may be rejected.

G. Any factory painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or construction shall be restored to original "new" condition. This includes complete repainting if necessary to provide exact paint match.

1339


3.5 VISITING THE PROJECT SITE

BASIC MECHAl"lICAL REQUIREMENTS SEcnON 15000 - 9

A. The premises shall be examined and conditions shall be understood which may affect performance of work of Division 15 before submitting proposals for this work.

B. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine existing site conditions.

3.6 TESTS

A. See individual specification sections for Testing Requirements.

PART 4 TABLES

4.1 COST BREAKDOWN TABLE

A. Provide separate breakdowns for Palmer Martin Hall and the work in Sundquist Hall.

Cost Breakdown Table Labor!

Material Installation Category Cost Cost Mobilization Supervision Site Utilities Underfloor Plumbing Plumbing Rough-In Plumbing Equipment (Floor Drains, Roof Drains, Water Hammer Arrestors, Valves, Hot Water Tanks, etc.) Plumbing Fixtures Piping Insulation Air Handling UnitslRTUIMAU Gas Unit HeaterslDuct Furnace Misc. HVAC Power Ventilators , Air Outlets and Inlets . Ductwork Fabrication Ductwork Installation Duct External Insulation . EMCS Programming and Submittals EMCS Installation Air and Water Balance Commissioning Assistance

END OF SECTION 15000

1339


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements

B. Section 15885 - Air Cleaning Devices

C. Section 15890 - Duc!\vork

SUSTAINABLE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SECTION 15005 - 1

D. Section 15970 - Energy Management and Control Systems

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All equipment must be protected from collecting dust and odors that can "stick" to porous materials in the system and later be released. The installation of each system must be evaluated in detail to determine how it may be affected by odor and dust from the project (including site egress, staging areas, etc.). Specific HVAC protection requirements generally apply to the return side, central filtration, or supply side of the system.

B. Ductwork and appurtenances should be inspected upon completion of the work for the amount of deposited particulate present and cleaned where needed. If significant dust deposits are observed in the system during construction, some particulate discharge can be expected during start-up. When such a discharge is only minor, delaying re-occupancy long enough to clean up the dust may be sufficient. In more severe cases, installing temporary coarse filters on diffbsers or cleaning the ducts· may be necessary. The condition of the main duct should be checked whenever visible particles are discharged from the systems

C. All return, exhaust and supply system openings in (or immediately adjacent to) the construetion area should be sealed V'lith plastic.

D. Provide a minimum 8 MER V filter during the building and cleaning flush out phase and replace with clean/permanent filters immediately prior to occupancy in accordance with Section 15885.

E. For related requirements for use of equipment during construction, see Section 15000, Temporary Heating. Use of equipment during construction is only allowed upon certain conditions.

1339


SUSTAINABLE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SECTION 15005 - 2

F. Diffusers and ducts may be adequately protected in most cases where the above measures are implemented. When the system is off for the duration of construction, diffusers should also be sealed in plastic for further protection.

G. Duct Cleaning: An HVAC system has excessive dust or debris when an accumulation of particles can be observed under (not on) diffusers, or ventilation is restricted. Cleaning of the air distribution system shall be required when a clean system becomes contaminated due to inadequate protection during the Construction process. A decision whether and how to clean the ducts should be based on a detailed visual inspection ofthe system. Both highly specialized equipment and professional expertise are required to ensure that dust is effectively removed and contained. The sequence in which duct cleaning occurs in the overall construction process needs to be carefully considered to avoid recontamination.

3.2 BUILDING FLUSHOUT

A. This section only applies to Operations Building (this does not apply to Shop Building).

B. After construction and prior to Owner occupancy with all interior finishes instailed, provide building flush-out. Flush-out may not begin until the following items are completed:

I. All construction work shall be completed including punchlist items. 2. All cleaning shall be finalized prior to flushout. 3. Final testing and balancing shall be completed. 4. Controls shall be functional

C. Commissioning may occur during flushout provided it does not introduce any additional contaminants in the building or influence the ventilation rates in the air systems.

D. Prior to flush-out, remove temporary construction filters and duct coverings provided as part of the construction IAQ management plan.

E. In air systems used for cleaning and flushing, install Merv 8 filters.

F. At the completion of cleaning and flushing, remove filters used in cleaning and flushing and replace with a new set of filters. Install filters on remaining air system components in accordance with Section 15885.

G. During cleaning and flushing the Building Automation Contractor shall control the systems to maintain a minimum space temperature of 60 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum RH of 60%

H. Refer to Section 15970 for supplemental information and calculations of flush out times and volumes.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Operation and Maintenance Manual

B. Certified Factory Start-up

C. Operation and Maintenance Training

D. Spare PartslMaintenance Materials

E. 96-Hour Run Test

F. Pre-Balance Requirements

G. Warranties

H. Final Cleaning

I. Record Drawings

J. Punch List Procedures

K. Maintenance Services

1.2 RELATEDSPF£IFICATIONS

A. Division I - Contract Closeout

B. Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements

C. Section I5990 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROJECT FINALIZATION SECTION 15010-1


B. Bind Operation and Maintenance Manuals for mechanical systems in black three-post, hard-backed binders imprinted in gold lettering with:

I. Job title 2. Date 3. Engineer 4. Architect 5. Contractor 6. Construction Division

C. Work shall be done in a print shop or bindery.

D. Provide a master index at the beginning ofthe manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for the sections and sub-sections of the manual.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ¥ AKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

E. Manual shall be organized into the following five sections:

1. Contacts

PROJECT FINALIZATION SECTION 15010 - 2

a This shall consist of name, address, and phone number of the following parties: Architect, Mechanical Engineer, Electrical Engineer, General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, Sheet Metal Contractor, Temperature Controls Contractor, Electrical Contractor and major equipment suppliers.

2. Equipment

a. Begin the Equipment section with a separate sub-section containing a list ofthe mechanical equipment indicating:

1) Equipment name and designation as it appears on the equipment schedule 2) Area served 3) Manufacturer 4) Model 5) Serial number 6) Name plate data

b. The remaining sub-sections shall include, at a minimum, the following for each item of Division 15 equipment. This material shall be organized in a separate tabbed subsection for each section of the specifications. Within each sub-section, provide separate tabs for each item of equipment, referencing the equipment schedule designation.

1) Provide the following information as applicable:

a) Performance curves or tables showing the specified operating points and the operating points after final testing and balancing

b) Manufacturer's maintenance instructions: Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, maintenance and lubrication instructions, troubleshooting guides, and overhaul specifications for major equipment.

c) Step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into operation

d) Wiring diagram for particular equipment item

2) Refer to individual specification sections for additional information required to be incorporated into the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3. Maintenance Schedule and Spare Parts

a This shall include two sub-sections:

1339

1) The first sub-section shall consist of a preventative maintenance schedule summary table (or list). The table shall be organized by specification section and include:



a) Equipment name and designation as it appears on the equipment schedule

b) Equipment location c) Type and frequency of preventative maintenance requirements

(including lubrication)

2) The second sub-section shall consist of a list of spare parts furnished under this contract. The list shall be organized by specification section and include (similar to that included at the end ofthis Section):

a) Equipment name and designation as it appears on the equipment schedule

b) Spare part furnished c) Verification by an Owner's Representative that the partes) have been

provided

4. Energy Management and Controls System

a. Shall be as specified in Section 15970.

5. Warranties and Certifications

a. Shall include:

I ) Test and balance reports 2) Test records of piping, tanks, ductwork, etc 3) Signed checklist ofinstruction period 4) Certificate from Health Department indicating acceptance of domestic water

quality 5) Copies of specific product warranties 6} Copies of certified factory start-up reports 7) Valve tag identification schedules 8} Copy of manual describing specific maintenance services that will be

furnished under this contract

F. Prior to binding, submit one (1) copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual to the Owner's Representative for review. After this review and final approval of the manuals, prepare two (2) copies of approved manuals for use during the instruction period. Following instruction period, turn over both copies to the Owner.

G. Manuals may be compiled in multiple volumes if necessary for ease of use.

1.4 CERTIFIED FACTORY START-UP

A. Refer to individual sections of these Specifications for specific requirements of certified factory startup.

B. Start-up shall be perfonned by a certified factory representative. Prior to start-up, certification of factory representative shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review.

1339


PROJECf FINALIZATION SECfION 15010 - 4

C. Start-up shall be scheduled with the owner to allow witnessing of start-up procedures by maintenance personnel. Operation and maintenance training fur equipment requiring certified mctnry start-up shall be conducted at the time of start-up with the certified factory representative present.

D. Certified factory start-up is required for the following equipment:

1. Make-Up Air Units (MAU) 2. Rooftop Units (RTU) 3. Variable Frequency Drives

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING

A. General

1. Two (2) training sessions shaH be scheduled. The first shall oecur after final inspection and prior to substantial completion. The second shat! occur prior to the end of the first year of operation after acceptance. Training sessions shall be scheduled with the owner a minimum of two weeks in advance.

2. Instruct the Owner's representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3. IndividualS present shall include the mechanical contractors, subcontractors and equipment factory representatives as appropriate. Certified factory representatives shall be present fur all equipment requiring certified factory start-up.

4. The contractor's representative performing the operation and maintenance training shall locate in the building each piece of equipment included in the O&M manuals, and shall instruct to the satisfaction of the owner's representative required operation and maintenance procedures as outlined in the O&M manuals.

5. Provide a digital video ofthe training sessions conducted and furnish copies oftlle video to the Owner. Digital videos shall be of sufficient quality to allow training of future employees or refresher training of personnel. Use DVD format unless directed otherwise by the owner.

6. The first training session shall occur after final inspection and prior to acceptance by owner. It shall be scheduled with the owner, and shaJl oecur in one consolidated session for all mechanical equipment.

a. Exceptions:

1339

I) Training for equipment requiring certified factory start-up shall be conducted at the time of start-up.

2) Multiple sessions shall be scheduled as required to maintain a maximum allowable duration of any single session offaur (4) hours.

3) When separate training sessions are warranted to achieve proper training on all equipment and systems, as determined by the owner's representative, multiple sessions shaH be scheduled as required.

4) EMCS system training shall occur independently, and shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15970.

5) Training session shall include all equipment included in the table at the end of this section. A table similar to this one shall be used to verifY owner training has bcen completed on all equipment, and shaH be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

7. The second training session shall oecur prior to the end of the first year of operation after acceptance. Prior to this session, the owner shall submit a list of items to be covered. This

CAMPUS OPERATIO"S COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

PROJECT FI"ALIZATION SECTIO" 15010 - 5

session shall include all parts of the first training session necessary to meet the satisfaction of the owner, up to and including full training of all equipment and systems.

1.6 SPARE PARTSIMAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. A list of spare parts to be provided under this contract has been included at the end of this section. Refer to individual specification sections for specific requirements of spare parts to be furnished under this contract.

B. Turn spare parts and materials over to Owner.

C. Provide summarized list of spare parts that have been furnished. List shall include verification by owner's representative that parts have been furnished. Incorporate into O&M Manual. Spare parts list shall be similar to that provided at the end ofthis section.

1.7 96-HOUR RUN TEST

A. The 96-hour test run shall be made when all field equipment is installed and the system is calibrated and running, and when all other building systems (including drywall, windows, doors, etc.) are complete. This period is intended to demonstrate the operation of the complete building.

B. The 96-hour run test shall include performance of all associated software and hardware operations called for in these specifications. The test shall be for a duration of96 continuous hours with no Contractor maintenance required. The pre-balance conference shall not be scheduled until this test has been completed satisfactorily (i.e. run without errors or alarms for a continuous 96-hour period). Noti1Y owner's representative prior to beginning the 96-hour run test.

1.8 PRE-BALANCE REQUIREMENTS (REFER TO SECTION 15990).

A. Provide Balance Agency with four (4) weeks written notice prior to start of Balance.

B. Pre-Balance Conference:

1339

1. Prior to commencing Balancing, assemble the following parties at the project site for a prebalance conference.

a General Contractor b. Plumbing Foreman c. Sheet Metal Foreman d. Control Technician e. Electrician f. Balance Agency g. Owner's Representative

2. TIle prime Division 15 contractor shall submit a pre-balance checklist similar to the table at the end of this section to the Balancing Agency and the Owner's Representative at the time of the pre-balance conference indicating that the system is ready for balance. The table at the end of this section shall be referenced for the minimum amount of information to be included in this checklist.

3. Should it be determined at the Pre-Balance Conference that the systems are not ready for balance, the balance shall be re-scheduled and the Owner's Representative shall be reimbursed for their travel cost and time at their normal hourly rates.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226


4. The Contractor shall make adjustments and changes in fan sheaves, belts, dampers and valves as required to achieve correct balance as recommended by the Balancing Agency at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall furnish the Balance Agency with a complete set of Contract Documents including drawings, specifications, shop drawings and change orders pertinent to testing and balancing.

D. The Contractor shall perform the following tasks and provide the following items to the Balance Agency:

I. TIle Contractor shall put heating, ventilating, and cooling systems and equipment into full operation and continue their operation during each working day oftesting and balancing for the Balancing Agency.

2. The Contractor shall make the sheet metal foreman and control contractor available upon request to aid in troubleshooting for the Balancing Agency.

3. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, ladders, and access tools for the Balancing Agency.

4. Make adjustments and changes in fan sheaves, belts and dampers as required to achieve correct balance as recommended by the Balance Agency at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Arrange access to all dampers, valves, balancing devices and operating equipment during the time that testing and balancing is to be performed.

E. The Control Contractor shall instruct the Balance Agency in the proper procedure for setting the controls, and provide a lap computer for accessing the control system. Upon completion of Balance, the laptop shall become the property of the Control Contractor.

F. 111e Control Contractor shall time for a control technician to assist the Balancing Agency.

1.9 WARRANTIES

A. Provide in accordance with section 01740 and the requirements of this section.

B. Provide specific equipment/material warranties that extend beyond 1 year project warranty period.

I. Refer to individual specifications sections for required extended warranties. 2. Incorporate extended warranties into O&M Manual in warranties section.

1.10 FINAL CLEANING


B. Clean up all equipment, materials, cartons and other debris that is a direct result of the installation of equipment under this contract.

C. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures. Repair damaged finishes and leave everything in working order.

D. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS


1339



B. Record differences between mechanical work as installed and as shown in Contract Documents on a set of prints of mechanical drawings to be furnished by Owner's Representative. Return these prints to Owner's Representative at completion of Project. Notations made On drawings shall be neat and legible. These drawings shall not be used for any other purposes.

C. Refer to individual specification sections for additional requirements.

1.12 PUNCH LIST PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing when the project is ready for punch lists. The following items must be complete before punch list will be performed, and must be provided with written verification:

I. Systems are complete and functional, including temperature controls. 2. Testing and balancing is complete, and test and balance reports have been submitted for

review. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals are complete, and have been submitted for review.

B. After punch lists are complete, written notice must be forwarded to the Owner's Representative requesting final checkout. Any additional trips beyond the final checkout required due to incomplete items on previous punch lists will be billed to the Contractor at normal rate plus travel expenses.

C. At the time of initial and final observation, the project foreman shall accompany the observation party and shall remove access panels and perform other duties, as required, to allow complete observation of the entire mechanical system.

1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICES

A. Provide a separate manual describing specific maintenance services to be provided under this contract as required under specific specification sections.

PART 2 (NOT USED)

PART 3 (NOT USED)

PART 4 TABLES

4.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING TABLE Operation and Maintenance Training Table

O&M Training

System Complete 15135 - Gauges and Meters 15410 - Plumbing Piping 15430 - Plumbing Specialties 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures 15450 - Plumbing; Equipment 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties 15624 -Indirect Fired Air Units

1339


I Operation and Maintenance Training Table

System 15786 - Ductless Split Air Conditioning Units

J5tl~~:- Terminal Heat Transfer Units 15870 - Power Ventilators 15885 - Air Cleaning Devices 15940 - Air Outlets and Inlets

f-~:;~70 - Energy Management and Controls SYstem 15971 - YllriableFrequency Drives 15990 - Testing,Adjusting and Balancing


IO&M I Training • Complete

The Contractor, asSOCiated factory representatIves and subcontractors, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof.

Owner's Representative Contractor

4.2 SPARE PARTS LIST

Spare Palis List ! Specification Mechanical Spare PartlExtra : Section Equipment Materials Verified By Date

15135 Test Kit 15430 Frost Proof Wall Two (2) Loose Keys

Hydrants 15440 Faucets I Two (2) Sets of Faucet

: Washers for Each . Infferent Washer Type

15440 Flush Valves Flush Valve Service Kits

15440 Faucets Two (2) of Each Different Cartridge Type

15624 Air Handling Units . One (I) Set of Fan (MAu/RTU) Belts for Each

Different Size andlor Type of Belt

15870 Power Ventilators One (1) spare set of belts and bearings fur each fan at project closeout.

15885 Air Cleaning Devices One (I) spare set of ! filters for each filter • bank.

1339



4.3 PRE-BALANCE CHECKLIST

Pre-Balance Checklist Item Complete General Contractor All doors and closures, windows and ceiling tile shall be installed 96-hour run test complete Plumbing Contractor All valves, flow meters, temperature/pressure taps installed correctly, functional and accessible Strainers and piping, clean, flushed, and free of debris All air purged from system Expansion tank air charge set Service and balance valves are open Sheet Metal Contractor Ductwork is intact and properly sealed Ductwork leak tested and repaired as required Access doors installed and properly secured Ductwork end caps installed Ductwork installed according to drawings and specifications Ductwork is free of debris All dampers, fire, volume, mixing, splitters are installed, accessible and open All operators and dampers are installed, accessible and operable Return air has unobstructed path from each conditioned space back to the unit All grilles, registers, diffusers and other devices are installed and functional Filters are clean and correctly installed Filter frames correctly installed and sealed Coils clean, properly installed and sealed Drive components installed Sheaves properly aligned and tight on their shaft Belts adjusted for correct tension Belt guard properly installed Automatic control dampers installed and functional Fan rotation correct Fan housing installed and sealed All flex connections and vibration isolators are installed correctly Fan wheel aligned with adequate clearance Fan bearings lubricated Controls Contractor Controls complete and functional Thermostats and sensors calibrated Program correct and functional Electrical Contractor Motors wired and energized Proper starter and overload protection installed

1339


Pre-Balance Checklist Item Correct fuses installed Motor secured to frame Motor bearings lubricated Fire alanns and duct smoke detectors are fully operational

General Contractor Sign-Off:

Plumbing Contractor Sign-Off:

Sheet Metal Contractor Sign-Off:

Controls Contractor Sign-Off:

Electrical Contractor Sign-Off:

1339

PROJECT FINALIZATION SECTION 15010 -10

Complete

Date:

Date:

Date:

Date:

Date:



PART 1 GENERAL


A. Division 2 - Earthwork


1.2 SCOPE OF REQUIREMENTS

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL SECTION 15051 - 1

A. This section shall include all necessary excavation, shoring, bedding and backfilling required for the installation of work specified and indicated under Division 15. This shall include but not be limited to piping, ductwork and other miscellaneous items inside building premises or outside as may be necessary.

1.3 TESTING

A. Compaction testing shall conform to ASTM 0-1557 for cohesive soils and ASTM 0-2049 for cohesionless soils.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Proper approval shall be obtained in accordance with applicable City, County and/or State regulations.

B. All safety regulations must be observed including applicable OSHA regulations.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions

I. A geotechnical investigation report may be available and included in the project manual for information only.

2. Data in the reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner or his representative will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.

B. Protection

I. Locate existing underground utilities in excavation areas. Ifutilities are indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations. Provide temporary utility services where necessary to maintain continuity of service. Provide minimum of seventy-two (72) hour notice to Owner prior to all utility interruptions. Remove existing utilities indicated to be removed. Where uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities are found, contact utility owner immediately for instructions.

2. Protect structures, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation operations. Damage resulting from excavation operations shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.

3. Slope sides of excavation to comply with State and local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations

1339



regardless of time period excavations will be open. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required.

4. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with State and local codes and ordinances. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 of.

5. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

6. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials until required for backfill (place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage). Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not suitable for use as backfill. Prevent spillage during hauling operations. In case of spills, clean streets, walks, etc. with power sweepers or as directed by the Owner's Representative.

PART 2 (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PERFORMANCE

A. Excavate to unifonn width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room clearance on all sides of pipe, duct, tanks, and equipment. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for piping to establish indicated slopes and invert elevations. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a minimum 6 inch layer of bedding materia) batween rock bearing surface and pipe. At each pipe joint over-excavate to relieve the bell or pipe joint of pipe loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on the bearing surface.

B. All pipe shall be laid on 6 inch minimum depth of bedding material.

C. Bedding material shall consist of sand, sandy gravel or fine crushed gravel having a maximum size of % inch. Place bedding material under and around the pipe to 6 inches above the top of the pipe. Distribute material in maximum layers of 6 inches and thoroughly compact by tamping. Take care to assure compaction under the haunches of tbe pipe. Note: pea gravel should not be used for pipe bedding.

D. Where pipes pass under column or wall footings, or within the volume included by extending down from the edge of column or wall footings at a 45 degree angle, and top of pipe is within 2 feet 6 inches below the bottom of the footing, pipes shall be encased in either a steel sleeve or 6 inches of lean (1,500 psi, 28 day test) concrete ail around the pipe, extending 5 feet beyond each side of the footing. Where the top of pipe is within 1 foot of the bottom ofthe footing, concrete encasement, if used, shall extend up to the bottom of the footing.

E. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of inspection, testing and approval by authorities having jurisdiction, recording oflocations of underground utilities, removal of concrete fonnwork, removal of shoring and bracing and backfilling of voids, and removal of trash and debris.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014.226


F. Backfill material shall be free of cinders, ashes refuse, organic and frozen material, boulders or other unsuitable materials. Suitable material excavated from the trench or other suitable site material not containing rocks in excess of 6 inches in their maximum dimension shall be used for backfill in quantities available. Provide additional suitable material as needed to complete baCkfilling operations.

G. Place backfill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Where layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, Or subsequent to, compaction operations.

H. Do not place backfill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Place backfill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of piping and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift. Compact carefully against foundation, basement and retaining walls so as not to create excessive pressure on walls.

L Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture·density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D-1557, and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D·2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).

I, Areas under Structures, Building Slabs, Steps, Pavement and Walkways: Compact each layer of backfill material to 90 % maximum density of cohesive material, or 95 % relative density for cohesionless material.

2. Other Areas: Compact each layer of backfill material to 85 % maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 % relative density for cohesionless soils.

3. Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the wan'anty period, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.

J. Buried Tanks:

1339

1. Bedding material, backfill and methods shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



PART 1 GENERAL


A. Water Meters

B. Pressure Gauges (Water Service)

C. Pressure Gauge Tappings

D. Stem Type Thermometers and Supports

E. Test Plugs



B. Section 15010 - Project Finalization

C. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Pressure Gauges

B. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element

1.4 SUSTAINABLE BUILDINGS

GAUGES AND METERS SECTION 15135·1

A. Provide Commissioning support as specified in Section 15996 and related documents.


A. General

1. Provide manufacturers data which indicates use, construction, operating range, total range, accuracy, and dimensions.

2. Provide a Gauge Application Table indicating each different use of gauges and the gauge range to be utilized, including minimum and maximum measurement values.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. General: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.

1339


1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Testkit

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METERS

A. Water meters:

1. Furnished by Utility Company

2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES (WATER SERVICE)

A. Manufacturers (Refer to Section 15000):

I. Tredee 2. Weiss 3. Weksler 4. Tel Tru 5. Miljoco

B. Basis of Design: Trerice Series 600C

GAUGES AND METERS SECTION 15135-2

C. Construction: ASME B40.1; 4Y, inch dial; hermetically sealed; field liquid fillable; cast aluminum case; brass tube and socket; brass movement; painted aluminum dial with black graduations on white background; suitable for outdoor use; psi scale as appropriate for intended use; full scale accuracy of plus or minus I %.

2.3 PRESSURE GAUGE TAPPINGS

A. % inch NPT brass ball valve rated for 250 psig; brass pressure snubber with % inch NPT connections.

2.4 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS AND SUPPORTS


I. Duro 2. Trerice 3. Weiss 4. Weksler 5. Tel Trn 6. Miljoco

B. Basis of Design: Trerice Series A401

C. Construction: Adjustable angle; red appearing mercury; lens fulnt tube; clear acrylic window up to 300 OF and double strength above 300 OF; Y.i inch long NPT brass stem with 2Ya inch insertion length; cast aluminum case with enamel or epoxy finish; cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device; scale to suit application; well to suit service; full scale accuracy within 2 %; Fahrenheit scale as appropriate for intended use.

1339


GAUGES AND METERS SECTION 15135 - 3

D. Supports: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required.

2.5 TEST PLUGS

A. Test Plug:

I. Manufacturers (Refer to Section 15000):

a. Flow Design b. MG Piping Products c. Pete's Plugs d. Sisco e. Trerice

2. Construction: Y, inch NPT or Y2 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 of; nordel core for temperatures up to 350 of; viton core for temperatures up to 400 of; brass extension for insulated pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install in complete conformance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.

C. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

D. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level without crawling or climbing. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

E. Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

3.2 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Provide pressure gauges where indicated on plans.

B. Install pressure gauges with snubbers. Provide ball valve to isolate each gauge. Extend nipples and syphons to allow clearances from insulation.

C. Install one pressure gauge per pump, (whether indicated on the drawings or not), with taps and isolation valves, points of connection shall be before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump; pipe to gauge.

3.3 PRESSURE GAUGE TAPPINGS

A. Install gauge taps in piping; refer to related piping specifications Sections.

B. At minimum, provide gauge taps for the purposes of calibration of gauges and thermometers installed in this section and calibration of sensors installed for the Energy Management and Direct Digital Control System in Section 15970.

1339


GAUGES AND METERS SECTION 15135 - 4

C. Where gauges and sensors are located at the same hydraulic and thermal point in the piping system (i.e. a pressure gauge, temperature gauge and Section 15970 located together) a single test plug may be provided.

D. Provide gauge taps as follows:

1. Adjacent to pressure gauges 2. Adjacent to thermometers 3. Adjacent to pressure and temperature sensors provided in Section 15970 4. Inlet and outlet of coil or equipment where pressure and temperature gauges are not

furnished. 5. Where indicated on drawings.

3.4 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide thermometers where indicated on plans. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2V, inches for installation of thermometer sockats 24 inches on each side of the thermometer. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation.

3.5 TEST PLUGS Al\'D KITS

A. Provide temperature and pressure test plugs where indicated on the plans.

B. Turn over test kit to the Owner at projeet closeout.


1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, AND FLASHINGS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15140-1 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-22.

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flashing

B. Inserts

C. Pipe Hangers and Supports

D. Pipe Insulation Shields

E. Resilient Clamps

F. Sleeves


A. Division 3 - Cast In Place Concrete

B. Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

C. Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements

D. Section 15145 - Seismic Provisions

E. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

F. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation

G. Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation

H. Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation

l. Section 154 \0 - Plumbing Piping

J. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties

1.3 REFERENCES

A. General

\. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping

B. Pipe Hangers and Supports

I. ASTM F70S - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers 2. MSS SP5S - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer 3. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 4. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, AND FLASHINGS YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15140 - 2 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226




A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLASHING

A. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil galvanized steel shell and base, rigid insulation, mitered 3 inch cant, wood nailer, with variable step to match roof insulation and gravel

B. Metal Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized steel

C. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gauge thick galvanized steel

D. Lead Flashing: Waterproofing - 5 pounds/foot' sheet lead; soundproofing - I pounds/foot' sheet lead; flexible flashing - 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing

E. Caps: Steel; 22 gauge minimum; 16 gauge at fire resistant elements

2.2 INSERTS

A. Construction: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment; top slot for reinforcing rods; lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS


I. GrinnelVAnvil 2. ERiCOlMichigan Hanger 3. Crane 4. Fee and Mason

B. Plumbing Piping DWV

I. Conform to MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes !/, to I Y, inches: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. MUltiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

1339

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, Al'iCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, AND FLASHIl'iGS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUl'iITY COLLEGE SECTION 15140·3 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

C. Plwnbing Piping - Water

I. Conform to MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes V, to I v,: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double

hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot pipe Sizes 6 inches and over: Steel channels with

welded spacers and hanger rods, casl iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Casl iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and over: Welded sleel bracket and wrought steel

clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp wilh adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 11. Vertical Support: Sleel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,

and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipes 10 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,

floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel

screws, and concrete pier or steel support. IS. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

D. Refrigerant Piping

1. Conform to MSS SP5S, MSS SP69, and MSS SPS9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes Y, to I Y, inches: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipes Sizes 2 inches and over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support fur Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support fur Pipe Sizes 4 inches and over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. S. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete

pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

E. Natural Gas Piping

1. Conform to MSS SPS&, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes V, to 8 inches: Carbon steel, plated adjm.1able swivel, ring.

1339

3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. S. Roof Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete

pier or steel support.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, A;o./D FLASHINGS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMU;o./ITY COLLEGE SECTlO;o./ 15140 - 4 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-220

F. Pipe Riser Clamps

I. Steel and Cast Iron Pipe: Extension pipe or riser clamp; carbon steel; black or galvanized finish.

a. Basis of design: Grinnell Fig 261.

2. Copper Pipe: Copper tubing riser clamp; carbon steel; copper finish.

a. Basis of design: Grinnell Fig CT-121.

2.4 HANGER RODS

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, Or continuous threaded.

2.5 PIPE INSULATION SHIELDS


I. Grinnell 2. Fee & Mason 3. M-Co 4. Pipe Shields, Inc 5. Kin-Line

B. Hot Piping (insulated pipe, 2 W' and larger): Protection saddle type; size to suit thickness of insulation; curved carbon steel plate; Grinnell Fig 160, 161, 162.

C. Hot Piping (up to 2"): Insulation protection shield type; carbon steel; galvanized finish; Grinnell Fig 167.

D. Cold Piping: Insulation protection shield type; carbon steel; galvanized finish; Grinnell Fig 167.

2.6 RESILIENT CLAMPS


1. Hydra-2orb

B. Construction: Resilient cushion with clamps and anchoring channel.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gauge thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe sleeve with integral welded weep ring cast in place in the slab or mechanical rubber pipe seals with galvanized steel minimum 18 gauge sleeve. Sleeves shall have galvanized finish and extend a minimum of 4" above the finished floor.

C. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed, refer to Section 07841.

D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, AND FLASHINGS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15140 - 5 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

F. Sleeves for below grade piping passing under footings: Class 52; ductile iron.

G. Sleeves for below grade piping passing through exterior walls - Mechanical Rubber Pipe Seals.

H. Stuffing Insulation: Glass fiber type; non-combustible; 3 lb. density.

I. Fire Safeing Sealant: Intumescent material capable of expanding up to 8 to 10 times when exposed to temperatures beginning at 250 of. It shall have ICBO, BOCA I approved ratings to 3 hours per ASTM E814 (UL 1479). 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Putty, strip and sheet forms.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Piping shall be installed in such a manner that it is not in contact with metal building components.

C. Provide neoprene or approved wrap between water piping and metal building components, unistrut or other metal.

I. Exceptions:

a. Not required where piping is isolated from hangers with insulation shields. b. Not required where resilient clamps are used.

D. Concrete housekeeping pads for mechanical equipment are not under Division 15. Coordinate required location and size with other Divisions and provide equipment shop drawings for proper sizing.

E. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring to other Divisions as applicable.

F. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with tlanges bolted to structure.

G. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.2 FLASHING

A. All pipes passing through the roof shall be tlashed at the roof with 4 Ibs. sheet lead which shall extend at least 10 inches in all directions from the pipe and run vertically up the pipe not less than 12 inches above the roof. Each pipe shall be countertlashed and made tight with lead countertlashing, extending down inside the pipe I II, inches and lapping over outside tlashing 3 inches or with a Zurn Z-196 vent fitting.

B. Flash all roof drains with 4 lb. sheet lead, extending at least 18 inches in all directions from drain.

C. Floor drains not located in concrete slab on grade shall have 41b. lead tlashing extending at least 18 inches in all directions from drain.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, AND FLASHINGS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15140·6 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·22()

D. Flashing shall be coordinated with roofing system requirements and shall suit style and type of roofing used. Roofing is not under Division 15.

E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe witb bolts; calk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.3 INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete fOffilwork.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide tbrough-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab in concealed areas and recessed into and grouted flush with slab in exposed areas.

3.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping in accordance with applicable codes and the table at tbe end of this section.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum V, inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with I V, inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent 10 each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.

F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

1. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

J. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. (Refer to Section 09910.) Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

K. Support vertical piping at every floor penetration with pipe riser clamps.

L. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

M. Support risers independently of connected horizontal piping.

N. Provide seismic bracing for pipes as required. Refer to Section 15145.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, AND FLASHINGS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15140 - 7 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

O. Install exposed piping on "Roof Pipe Supports".

3.5 PIPE INSULATION SIDELDS

A. Provide shields to protect pipe insulation at hangers. (Furnished and installed under Section 15 [40.)

B. Size hangers to accommodate pipe inSUlation and insulation shields where applicable. See Section [5260.

3.6 PIPE INSULATION INSERTS

A. Furnished under Section 15260, installed under Section 15140.

3.7 RESILIEI'\'T CLAMPS

A. Use to attach tubing, pipe, or hoses to vibrating machinery or equipment.

B. Use to isolate piping from contact with other metals, steel partition studs.

3.8 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for above grade duct and piping penetrations of wans, roofs and floors and piping through floors for slab on grade.

B. See drawings and details for pipe sleeves.

C. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping, where required.

E. Where piping penetrates a roof, floor or wall, close off space between pipe and sleeve with 3 lb. Fiberglass insulation and Sealant (airtight). This applies to all roofs, walls or floors regardless offire rating. Refer to Section 07841. Note: 3 lb. insulation not required at roof penetrations. Use fire safeing sealant at penetrations off Ire rated floors and walls.

F. Provide chrome plated steel escutcheons at penetrations of finished surfaces (includes all pipe penetrations).

PART 4 TABLES Pipe Size Max. Horizontal Spacing for Hangers Hanger Rod (inches) (feet) Dia.

i Threaded or Welded Joints CoppcrTube (inches) Steel (excluding Stecl (gas) and Piping

gas) (soldered, brazed or

i welded joints) y, 10 6 6 3/8 % 10 8 6 3/8 I 10 8 6 3/8

1% 10 IO 6 3/8 IV, 12 10 6 3/8

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, CURBS, SEALS, AND FLASHINGS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15140·8 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

Pipe Size Max. Horizontal Spacing for Hangers Hanger Rod

i (inches) (feet) Dia.

I Threaded or Welded Joints Copper Tnbe (inChes) Steel (excluding Steel (gas) and Piping

gas) (soldered, brazed or

welded 'oints) 2 t03 12 10 10 Y,

i 4 t06 12 10 10 5/8 8 to 12 12 10 10 7/8

: Notes: • L Cast iron pipe shall be suspended in accordance with Tables 3·1 and 3·2 of the Unifonn · Plumbing Code, as amended by Washington State. I 2. Vertical piping shall be supported in accordance with Table 3·2 ofthe Unifonn Plumbing · Code, as amended by Washington State.

3. Horizontal cast iron hub-less piping shall be supported at every other joint unless that pipe exceeds 4 feet in length. In that case, the pipe shall be supported within 18 inches of each side of the joint. See Table 3-2 of the Unifonn Plumbing Code. 4. For pipe materials other than indicated above, support in accordance with the manufacturers

!

re uirements and the Unifonn Plum."'b"'in=C"'o"'d"'e'--_______________ --'


1339


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

WIND AND SEISMIC LOAD RESTRAINTS SECTION 15145 - 1

A. Drawings and Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 I Specifications Sections apply to this Section.

B. Work in this section applies to all systems furnished and installed in division 15.

C. Division 3 - Concrete

D. Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical Req uirements

E. Section 150 I 0 - Project Finalization

F. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

I. All equipment and piping and ductwork as noted on the drawing's schedule or in the specification shall be seismically braced if the building is so classified as listed herein. Vibration control shall apply as described in all cases herein.

2. All outdoor equipment, including roof-mounted components, shall comply with section 1609, Wind Load, 1BC-2012. There shall be no decrease of the effects of wind load on a component due to other structures or components acting as blocks or screens.

3. Seismic bracing and wind load materials shall be the certified products of the same manufacturing group and shall be certified by that group.

4. It is the intent of the seismic and wind load portion of this specification to keep all mechanical, building system components in place during a seismic or high wind event and additionally operational where the occupancy category of the building so requires as listed herein.

5. All components necessary for restraint shall be provided in this section including but not limited to cables, attachments, fasteners, anchors, struts, channels etc.

6. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic and wind codes, component manufacturer's and building construction standards.

7. This specification is considered to be minimum req uirements for seismic and wind and vibration control considerations.

8. Any variation, which results in non-compliance with the specification requirements, shall be corrected by the contractor in an approved manner.

B. The work in this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:

I. Seismic restraints for isolated components. 2. Seismic restraints for non-isolated components. 3. Wind restraints for isolated components. 4. Wind restraints for non-isolated components. 5. Special inspections for seismic and wind restraint designs 6. Certification of seismic and wind restraint designs. 7. Installation supervision.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX WIND AND SEISMIC LOAD RESTRAINTS SECTION 15145 - 2 Y AKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE

STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

8. Design of attachment of housekeeping pads. 9. All components requiring IBC compliance and certification. 10. All inspection and test procedures for components requiring !BC compliance.

C. All division 15 systems, within, on or outdoors of the building and entry of services to the building is part of this Specification.

1.3 GENERAL DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Design Requirements.

I. Mechanical Systems IMPORTANCE FACTOR

a. All components shall have importance factors within one of the categories below:

1) Natural Gas Piping, Ip=1.5 2) Gas Fired Heating Equipment, lp= 1.5 3) All other Division 15 Ducts, Systems and Equipment, 1p=I.O

2. SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS: This project has seismic design requirements as follows:

a. Refer to the structural drawings for the project specific design conditions: mapped spectral accelerations, site class, spectral response coefficients, seismic design category, etc. In the event of a conflict between the IBC and the structural draWings, the more restrictive requirements shall be utilized in the design.

b. The structural drawings indicate that that this project falls within Seismic Design Category D.

3. WIND CONSIDERATIONS: This project has wind design requirements as follows:

a. Refer to the structural drawings for the project specific design conditions: design wind speed, exposure category, topographic factor, internal pressure coefficient, etc. In the event of a conflict between the IBC and the structural drawings, the more restrictive requirements shall be utilized in the design.

B. General Design Perfonnance Requirements

1339

1. Seismic and Wind Load Certification and Analysis:

a. Attachment calculations by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer's licensed Engineer substantiating the mounting system, wind or seismic restraints, fasteners or ICC Certified Concrete Anchors shall be submitted for approval to the project Structural Engineer along with the shop drawings,

I) Forces shall be clearly identified so that the Structural Engineer can determine the suitability of the building's structure to support these attachments.

2) The calculation submittal shall include a set of floor plans clearly identifying attachment locations for each component as well as pipe supports.

3) Calculations shall be keyed to the floor plans.

b. Seismic and wind loads shall have their calculations based on seismic loads as established in this section.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX Y AlOMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

WIND AND SEISMIC LOAD RESTRAINTS SECTION 15145 -3

c. A registered professional engineer having a PE from the same state or territory as the project shall stamp all analysis, or as required by local building codes.

d. Unless otherwise specified or exempt within the IBe, all equipment and piping shall be restrained to resist seismic forces. Restraints shall maintain equipment or piping work in a captive position. Restraint devices shall be designed and selected to meet seismic requirements as defined in the latest issue ofthe International Building Code and ASCE and applicable state and local codes.

2. Importance Factor, Ip = 1.5 Components:

a. In addition to all of the above provisions, for components having an Ip greater than 1.0, all trades shall comply with Sections 16 and 17 of the International Building Code using, when available, vendors that comply with the provisions stated herein and submitting the special inspections listed within these specifications. Where compliance is not possible, each contractor shall submit a vendor report (form CVC-l at end of this specification) clearly indicating that none of the specified, listed or other vendors known to the contractor meets the compliance, testing and certification portions of the IBC specification's Sections 16 and 17. Special inspections ofthe component installation shall still be conducted even lfno vendors meet the following requirements. All non· isolated and isolated equipment (components) shall be secured to the structure in accordance with that code.

b. For all division 15 components with an Ip=I.S: the Approved Agency's Certificate of Compliance for the specific equipment on this project when the Seismic Design Category is C through F. Analytical or Shaker Test certification through the component's load path to structure at its center of gravity shall include anchorage, structural and on-line capability. Use of seismic experience data shall be permitted if evidence confirms that the historical based component has the same construction and weight and accompanying center of gravity as submitted unit and basis of experience claim confonns to loads derived in testing with accompanying accelerations based on AC-IS6. Seismic qualification by seismic experience data based upon nationally recognized procedures acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction shall be deemed to satisfy the design and evaluation requirements provided that the substantiated seismic capacities equal Or exceed the seismic demands determined in accordance with Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2 of ASCE 7-05.

3. Special and Periodic Inspection:

a. The following systems shall require Special Inspection and Periodic Special Inspection for seismic installation and anchorage during the course of construction, as defined earlier in this section for all buildings in Seismic Design Categories C through F.

1339

1) AU piping systems with flammable, toxic, combustible or highly toxic contents and their associated system components. (Periodic)

2) Isolator units for seismic isolation system that have less than \<1" between the equipment support frame and the support. (periodic)

4. Contractor Responsibilities and Approvals:

a. Contractor shall install all components in accordance with the calculation package prepared by the Seismic and Wind Design Professional for each component on the project.



b. Special field inspection and testing is required for select components or systems by IBC Sections 1704, 1707 and 1708. Components shall be inspected by a special inspector periodically during the course of installation that is retained by the manufacturer provided seismic and wind restraints as part of the scope of work of this section. Contractor shall submit such inspection reports as part of his project wrap up for each group of equipment, components so requiring this program.

5. Design Seismic Loads:

1339

a. Projects shall have a minimum design load ofO.4g for statically mounted components and O.5g for resiliently mounted components. Actual loads for both internal and external isolation andlor anchorage of components shall be as above or as calculated for the specific project location but in no event shall it be less than the above.

b. Exclusions for seismic restraint of piping shall be according to applicable codes and as stated herein. The minimum horizontal restraint capability shall be O.4g horizontal and O.27g vertical (in addition to the gravity load). Life safety equipment defined above shall be designed to withstand a horizontal load ofO.9g and a vertical load of O.6g.

c. Analysis for anchorage must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment depth andlor welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in this section, acting through the equipment center of gravity.

d. Vertical load shall be calculated at 1/3 the horizontal load as a minimum, or, as prescribed by the code as 0.2 times Sds.

e. Internally isolated equipment in lieu of specified isolation and restraint systems must meet all of the requirements of this section, all articles.

f, A Seismic Design Errors and Omissions Insurance Certificate shall accompany the seismic restraint equipment manufacturer's calculation. Product liability insurance certificates are not acceptable.

g. Whether the equipment is internally Or externally isolated and restrained, the entire unit assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. Curb Or roof rail mounted equipment must not only have seismic or wind attachment of the equipment to the roof but also to the curb or rails. The attachment and certification thereof shall be by this section. Sheet metal screw attachment is acceptable provided that the following five conditions are met and verified.

1) Calculations support sufficient quantity and size of sheet metal screws to handle all loads including shear.

2) Shear and tension allowables are obtained from an accredited third party source, such as ICC or NOS, not from the screw manufacturer.

3) Space or gap between the inside overhang of the rooftop unit and the curb at each of the screw locations is closed with structural material, tapered to contour to both the curb and the components' inside edge structure.

4) Attachment points ofthe roof-mounted unit to curb and the curb to structure demonstrates structural load path.

5) The method of attachment does not violate the NRCA rating of the curb by violating the roof member's waterproofing.

h. Failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point or load path between component and structure. Permanent deformation of the component is acceptable as



long as the component continues to operate without failure and, if permanent, it is within acceptable manufacturing or structural tolerances.

6. Design Wind Loads:

a. All outdoor mounted components shall be positively fastened to their supporting structure as discussed below. Fastening to metal deck is unacceptable.

b. Loads and calculations shall be based on IBC-2012, figure 1609 and related sections in ASCE 7-05.

c. Equivalent basic wind speed shall be based on criteria outlined in Section 1.4. d. In no event shall adjacent buildings, structures or screens be considered to diminish

the calculated wind load or its effect on an outdoor component.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. A Seismic Design Errors and Omissions Insurance Certificate shall accompany the seismic restraint equipment manufacturer's calculation

B. Product Data: The manufacturer of wind and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows:

1. Descriptive Data:

a. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and restraints by referencing numbered descriptive drawings.

b. Where isolators are provided in Section 15245, review product submittals and determine appropriate seismic attachments and restraints.

2. Shop Drawings:

1339

a. Calculations shall be submitted as required in Section 1.4, General Design and Performance Requirements.

b. The calculations shall be accompanied with floor plans shop drawings that show the location of all of the components as well as location of pipe bracing. When walls are utilized as a brace, this shall be indicated on the drawings and details provided for the penetration.

c. Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations.

d. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. e. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for restraint

locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing and maximum seismic/wind loads at the restraint points.

f. Provide specific details of restraints and anchors, include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. Restraint and anchor allowables shall be by structural testing, shake testing, analysis or third party certification.

g. Details:

1) Details shall be prepared by the Seismic and Wind Design Professional as part of this scope of work.


C. Closeout

1. Special Inspection Certificates

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

WIND AND SEISMIC LOAD RESTRAINTS SECTION 15145 - (I

A. Manufacturer of wind and seismic load control equipment or manufacturer's approved representative shall have the following responsibilities:

1. Review vibration isolation and restraint sizes and locations. 2. Provide calculations and materials, if required, for restraint of isolated and non-isolated

equipment. 3. Provide installation instructions in writing, drawings and trained field supervision, where

necessary, to insure proper installation and performance. 4. CertifY correctness of installation upon completion, in writing. 5. All provisions of Section 1.4, General Design and Performance ReqUirements.

B. All manufacturers of vibration control, wind and seismic restraining systems must provide a Seismic Design Error and Omissions Insurance Certificate for their firm or their design consultant to certifY their ability to provide engineering and design as required by this section. This document shall be provided at the time of first submittal from the seismic restraint provider.

C. All manufacturers of any type of equipment inclUding OEM are responsible for Section 1.4.

1,6 RELATED WORK

A. Housekeeping pad structural design, including its attachment to building structure, shall be by the structural engineer of record or as shown On the contract drawings. Attachment of all components and restraints to the pad and size of the pad shall be designed and certified according to this section by the seismic/isolation supplier. Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the concrete section contractor, or by the contractor where specified. Housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate a minimum 6" of clearance all around the equipment; or 12 times the outermost anchor bolt diameter, whichever is greater. Where exterior isolators are used, this distance shall be as measured from the outermost holes in the isolator base plate tn the edge of the housekeeping pad.

B. The Seismic and Wind Design Professional providing work in this section shall coordinate all seismic and wind forces with the Project Structural Engineer so that the Project Structural Engineer can verify that all roof, concrete and interior/exterior steel can support the imposed seismic and wind forces including, but not limited to, tension, compression, and moment loads.

C. Where ceilings are not braced, lay-in diffusers, weighing more than 20 lbs, shall have at least 2 independent comer diagonal wire ties to structure.

D. Lay-in ceilings in compliance with seismic code requirements may use earthquake clips or other approved means of positive attachment to brace fixtures such as panel lights and diffusers less than 40 Ibs to T -bar structures.

1.7 CODE AND STANDARDS REQUmEMENTS

A. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards

1. All City, State and Local Codes (Code)

1339



8. SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Mechanical Systems, Second Edition (Standard reference, to be used for design purposes only, not code)

b. International Conference of Building Officials (lCBO) (Standard) c. International Building Code (Code) d. ASHRAE (Standard reference, to be used for design purposes only, not code). e. VISCMA (Vibration Isolation and Seismic Controls Manufacturers Association)

(Standard reference, to be used for design purposes only, not code).

2. In cases where requirements vary. the guideline for the most stringent shall be utilized. 3. Use IBC-2012 as reference code standard unless otherwise designated.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Manufacturers (refer to Section 15000 for substitutions):

I. Vibro-Acoustics (Basis of Design) 2. The VMC Group including Vibration Mounting and Controls, Amber Booth or Korfund

Dynamics 3. Kinetics 4. Mason

B. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this Section shall be the product of a single manufucturer with the exception of flexible connectors.

C. Manufacturer shall be a regular member of VI SCM A (Vibration Isolation and Seismic Controls Manufacturers Association).

2.2 COATINGS

A. This section applies to all non stainless steel components located outdoors for seismic and wind anchoring and equipment supports

B. Products shall be hot dipped galvanized Or coated with a Dry Powder - Baked TGIC Polyester coating equal to ALESTA ASA-61 P AM (DuPont) which is both lead and cadmium free.

C. Each component is to be individually dipped, or coated & baked, following shearing, notching, punching, & forming to provide 100% coverage over the entire finished piece to include the interior, exterior and all metal edges. The coating process is completed prior to assembly ofthe unit to insure all joined surfaces (panel to panel joints), are covered. Spray or brush applied coatings on the exterior of the assembly only are not acceptable.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Refer to section 15245

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Refer to Section 15245

1339

CAMPUS OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 20)4·226

2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION TYPES

A. Type I: Thrust Restraints

I. Manufacturer (refer to 15000 for substitutions):

a. Vibro-Acoustics type HCS, AHCS b. VMCtypeRSHTR, TRK

WIND AND SEISMIC LOAD RESTRAINTS SECl'ION 15145 - 8

2. A spring element similar to Type A isolator shall be combined with steel angles, backup plates, threaded rod, washers and nuts to produce a pair of devices capable oflimiting movement of air handling equipment to ';4" due to thrust forces. Contractor shall supply hardware.

3. Thrust restraints shall be installed on all cabinet fun heads, axial Or centrifugal fans whose thrust exceeds 10% of unit weight.

B. Type J: Pipe Anchors

1. Manufacturer (refer to 15000 for substitutions):

a. Vibro-Acoustics type Pipe Anchor (PA) b. VMC types MDPA, AG

2. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing or piping separated by a minimum V;i' thick of 60 durometer elastomer.

3. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar materia! arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction.

4. Applied loads on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction.

C. Type K: Pipe Guides


a. VMC types PGfAG/SWP/SWX

2. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopiC arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing or piping separated by a minimum V;i' thickness of 60 durometer elastomer.

3. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and replaceable to allow for selection of pipe movement.

4. Guides shall be capable of ± 1 5/8" motion, Or to meet location requirements.

2.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINT TYPES

A. Type Ill: All-Directional Seismic Snubber


a. Vibro-Acoustics type Snubber b. VMC type SR, ER

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STAT£ PROJ£CT NO. 2014·226

WIND AND SEISMIC LOAD RESTRAINTS SECTION 15145·9

2. AII·directional seismic snubbers shall consist ofinterlocking steel members restrained by an elastomeric bushing. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of W' thick. Applied loading shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1 IS" shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable to allow inspection of internal clearances. Elastomeric bushings shall be rotated to insure nO short circuits exist before systems are activated.

B. Type IV: Floor or Roof Anchorage

I. Cast·ln Plates 2. Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type anchor bolts, anchored plates, machine

screw, bolting or welding. Power shots are unacceptable. 3. Anchor bolts must be approved by the ICC·ES for seismic and wind loading

C. Type V; Seismic Cable Restraints

l. Manufacturer (refer to 15000 for substitutions);

a. Vibro-Acoustics type SRK b. VMC types SB, LRC

2. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize one crimping sleeve or two clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges.

D. Type VI; Rigid Arm Brace

.1. Manufacturer (refer to 15000 for substitutions);

a. Vibro-Acoustics type RRK b. VMCtype SAB

2. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two anchor bolts to provide proper attachment spaced to ICBO standards for attachment to concrete.

E. Type VII: Internal Clevis Cross Brace

I. Internal clevis cross braces at seismic locations shall be pre-cut pipe or other approved device sized for internal dimensions.

2.7 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. General

1339

1. All curbs and roof rails are to be bolted or welded to the building steel or anchored to the concrete deck (minimum thickness shall be 4") for resisting wind and seismic forces in accordance with the project location. (Fastening to metal deck is unacceptable.)


B. Base Types

I. Type B-1: Integral Structural Steel Base


a. Manufacturer (refer to 15000 for substitutions):

I) Vibro-Acoustics type SB 2) VMC types WFB, SFB, WSB

b. RectangUlar bases are preferred for all equipment. c. Centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases may be T or L shaped where

space is a problem. Pump bases for split case and end suction pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge elbows.

d. All perimeter members shall be structural steel beams with a minimum depth equal to JII2 of the longest dimension between isolators.

e. Base depth need not exceed 12" provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer.

f. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a minimum base clearance of 2."

2.8 ROOF MOUNTING CURB

A. Curbs for section 15624 equipment shall be provided in section 15624 in accordance with the requirements of this section.

B. Manufacturer's:

I. MicroMetl 2. TbyCurb 3. Vibroconstlcs Model RC (Basis of Design)

C. Construction

I. Galvanized steel with a wood nailing strip for attaching field supplied and applied flashing. 2. Curbs include a closed cell neoprene gasket to create a weather seal between the top ofthe

curb and the bottom of the equipment support framing. 3. Curbs be constructed with a sloped bottom to match the roof pitch. 4. Provide internal insulation to minimize heat loss through the curb walls. 5. Curbs shall be designed with internal reinforcing to resist seismic and wind loading specific

to the project requirements, and stamped engineering calculations are submitted for approval. 6. Height to accommodate roof flashing above finished insulated room surface. 7, Supply and return duct openings to match respective rooftop unit. Openings with gasketing

material. 8. Channel to allow adjustment ofrctum air opening location,

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. All areas that will receive components requiring vibration control, seismic or wind load bracing shall be thoroughly examined for deficiencies that will affect their installation or performance. Such deficiencies shall be corrected prior to the installation of any such system.

1339

CAMPUS OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226


B. Examine all "rough ins" including anchors and reinforcing prior to placement.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. All vibration isolators and seismic, wind restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and all certified submittal data.

B. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic, wind restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system specified herein.

D. The contractor shall not install any isolated components in a manner that makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.

E. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building.

F. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur due to overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. General bracing may occur from flanges of structural beams, upper truss cords in bar joist construction and cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. Bracing attachments to flanges shall be made by bolts, welds or seismically rated beam clamps.

G. Seismic cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment or piping.

H. Seismic cable assemblies are installed taut on non-isolated systems. Seismic rigid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems.

L At locations where seismic cable restraints or seismic single arm braces are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads. See Table "E."

]. At all locations where seismic cable braces and seismic cable restraints are attached to the pipe clevis, the clevis bolt must be reinforced with pipe clevis cross bolt braces or double inside nuts if required by seismic acceleration levels.

K. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted.

L. Special and Periodic Inspections for items listed in Section lA, Article B shall be conducted and submitted on a timely basis.

M. Provide all components necessary in accordance with the Seismic and Wind Design professional's requirements. This includes but is not limited to cables, channels, fasteners, struts, attachments, brackets, etc. Unless indicated otherwise in these specifications, components shall be galvanized.

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Equipment shall be isolated andlor restrained as per Tables A-E at the end ofthis section.

1339



B. Components that are rigidly attached to the duct systems (no flex connections) and weigh less than 75 Ibs can be restrained by the supports restraining the duct system. Components that weigh 75 pounds or more or are resiliently mounted shall be supported and laterally braced independently of the duct system.

C. Devices such as dampers and diffusers shall be positively attached with mechanical fasteners Or be independently supported.

D. When indicated in the documents, place floor mounted equipment on minimum 4" actual height concrete housekeeping pads properly sized and doweled or expansion shielded to the structural deck to meet acceleration criteria (see Section 1.4). Anchor isolators andior bases to housekeeping pads. Concrete work for housekeeping pads is provided in division 3 of the documents.

E. When equipment is specified with Concrete Inertia Base, concrete shall be provided in this section in accordance with the requirements of division 3.

F. Additional Requirements:

I. The minimum operating clearance under all isolated components bases shall be 2." 2. All bases shall be placed in position and supported temporarily by blocks or shims, as

appropriate, prior to the installation ofthe equipment, isolators and restraints. 3. All components shall be installed on blocks to the operating height of the isolators. After the

entire installation is complete and under full load including water, the isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators. Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verifY that there are no short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free to move in all directions, within the limits of the restraints.

4. Ceilings containing diffusers or lighting fixtures must meet seismic requirements by using earthquake clips of other approved means of positive attachment to secure diffuser and fixtures to T-bar structure.

5. All floor or wall-mounted equipment and tanks shall be restrainect with Type IV restraints.

G. Exemptions:

I. As allowed in 2012 IBC. Provide written request to deviate from this specification prior to bid when the manufacturer believes that seismic restraints as specified in this section are not required with appropriate substantiating data.

3.4 PIPING, DUCTWORK AND CONDUIT ISOLATION

A. Vibration Isolation of Piping:

1. Piping and ductwork: All spring type isolation hangers shall be pre-compressed or prepositioned if isolators are installed prior to fluid charge. If installed afterwards, field precompressed isolators can be used.

2. Provide isolation on piping and ductwork when specified in section 15245.

B. Pipe Expansion: Where significant thermal expansion is anticipated, expansion loops are indicated on the drawings.

C. Seismic Restraint of Piping:

1339



I. Pipe shall be seismically restrained or braced. Type V seismic cable restraints shall be used if piping is isolated. Type V seismic cable restraints or Type VI single arm braces may be used on non-isolated piping.

2. See Table D for maximum seismic bracing distances. 3. Multiple runs of pipe on the same support shall have distance detennined by calculation. 4. Rod braces shall be used for all rod lengths as listed in Table E at seismic bracing locations. 5. Clevis hangers shall have braces placed inside of hanger at seismic brace locations. 6. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse

and longltudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction.

7. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same or smaller size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within 24" of the centerline of the smaller pipe or combined stresses are within allowable limits at longer distances.

8. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints. Use Type V or VI restraint, if trapeze is smaller than 48" long.

9. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines or cross-mains. 10. Where pipe passes through a fire-rated, seismic gypsum wall, the wall can act as a

lateral/transverse brace for pipe sizes up to and including 6," provided fire stopping material is tight to the pipe.

I I. Where pipe passes through a seismic block or concrete wall, the wall can act as a lateral/transverse brace.

12. Where horizontal pipe crosses a building'S drift expansion joint, allowance shall be part of the design to accommodate differential motion.

1339

13. Vertical pipe rises between floors shall have their differential movement part ofthe seismic design for building drift.

14. For horizontal passage of all underground utilities through building's foundation basement wall, all pipes shall pass freely through an oversized opening and waterproofed accordingly to accommodate maximum allowable building drift.

IS. For horizontal passage of all underground utilities through building's basement wall, all pipes shall pass freely through an oversized opening and waterproofed accordingly to accommodate maximum allowable building drift with a Seismic Restraint Type VIII.

16. Exemptions:

a. High defonnability piping (steel, copper, aluminum or similar) is used, piping is individually supported, provisions are made to avoid impact with Jarger piping or components and the following size requirements are satisfied:

I) For Seismic Design Category C, 2" or less in diameter where Ip ~ 1.5. 2) For Seismic Design Category D, E or F, 3" or less in diameter where Ip ~

1.0. 3) For Seismic Design Category D, E or F, I" or less in diameter where Ip ~

1.5.

b. All clevis supported pipe runs installed less than 12" from the top of the pipe to the support point of the structure. All trapeze supported pipe suspended by hanger rods having a distance less than 12" in length from the underside of the pipe support to the support point of the structure. Hangers shall be detailed to avoid excessive bending of the rods and their attachments and shall be proven by calculations. Provisions shall be made for piping to accommodate expected deflections and differential movement



between connected components. If a single location within a run of pipe exceeds the lengths specifIed above then the exemption is not valid.

D. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork:

I. Type V seismic cable restraints or resilient single arm braces shall be used if ductwork is isolated. Type V seismic cable restraints or Type VI single arm braces may be used on nonisolated ductwork.

2. Restrain flat oval ducts the same as rectangular ducts ofthe same nominal size. 3. See Table D for maximum seismic bracing distances. 4. Duct must be reinforced at the restraint locations. Reinforcement shall consist of an

additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork is to be attached to both upper angle and lower trapeze. Additional reinforcing is not required if duct sections are mechanically fastened together with frame bolts and positively fastened to the duct support suspension system.

S. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than Or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected.

6. Walls, including gypsum board non-bearing partitions, which have ducts running through them, may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame.

7. If ducts are supported by angles, channels or struts, ducts shall be fastened to it at seismic brace locations in lieu of duct reinforcement.

8. Provide wind restraints for exterior ductwork. This shall include flange rings, guy wires, turnbuckles and accessories for vertical duct stacks. All components for restraints on the roof shall be stainless steel.

9. Exemptions: Seismic restraints are not required for duct work with Jp 1.0 or I.S if any of the following conditions are met:

a. HVAC ducts have a cross-sectional area less than 6 square feet. b. HV AC ducts are supported by hanger rods 12" or less in length from the point of

attachment to the duct support to the attachment point of the supporting structure. Hangers shall be detailed to avoid excessive bending of the rods and their attachments and shall be proven by calculations. Provisions shall be made for duct work to accommodate expected deflections and differential movement between connected components. If a single location within a run of pipe exceeds the lengths specified above then the exemption is not valid.

E. Vibration Isolation of Conduit

I. Provide flexible steel conduit at connections to all vibrating equipment when required by 15245.

F. Seismic Restraints of Conduit

I. Provide similar to piping for all conduit as described for piping.

a. Exception Conduit that is 2.5" and smaller that is suspended by individual hanger rods.

G. Penetration isolation: Pipe and duct penetrations through walls, floor and roof shall have penetration isolation provided as specified in section 15245.

1339


3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, INSPECTION


A. All Independent Special and Periodic Inspections must be performed and submitted on components as outlined in Section 104 B, Article 4. (See also Contractor Responsibility, Section lAB, Article 5.) Note: Special Inspection services are to be supplied by the owner.

B. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices, the manufacturer's chosen representative shall inspect the completed project and certify in writing to the Contractor that all systems are installed properly, or list any that require correction. The contractor shall submit a report to the Owner's representative, including the representative's report, certifying correctness oflhe installation or detailing corrective work to be done.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUlIil1'Y COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO, 2014-226


PART 4 TABLES

4.1 SPACING CHART FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS

Table "0" Seismic Bracing (Maximum Allowable Spacing Shown- Actual Spacing to Be Determined by Calculation)

! Equipment On Center Transverse On Center Longitudinal

Change Of Direction

. Pipe Threaded Welded, Soldered Or Grooved' Conduit and Conduit Racks • To 16" 40Feet 80 Feet 4 Feet

18" - 28" 30 Feet 60 Feet 4 Feet 30" - 40" I 20 Feet 60 Feet 4 Feet

~&oI:al'l2:er 10 Feet 30 Feet 4 Fe."'et'--____ -l

4.2 VERTICAL HANGER ROD BRACING SCHEDULE

Table "E" Hanger Rod Bracing Schednle (Stiffener to be maximum 6" from end of rod)

RodDia. Clamp Size Maximum Steel Angle Size Clamp Min # of Un-braced Rod Spacing Clamps per

Length Stiffener 3/8" SREC-I-1/4 19" lxIxv." 16" 2 112" SRBC-I-1I4 25" lxIxv." 20" 2 518" SREC-I-1/4 31" 1 x 1 X 1/411 24" 2 3/4" SREC-I-I!2 37" IYzxIYzxW' 28" 2 7/8" SREC-I-I!2 43" I YzxIYzxv." 33" 2

I" SREC-I-I!2 50" 1 Yz x 1 Yz X V411 40" 2 I 118" SREC-I-I!2 62" 1 :h x 1 Y2 X V4lt 50" 2

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNrfY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226


FORM CVC-l FOR USE GROUP III PROJECTS, IBC-2000 & OCCUPANCY IV PROJECTS, IBC-2003-2012.

Section 15145: Seismic Restraints

Contractor Name: _________________ _ Date: _________________________________________ __

Spec1fication Section: ________________ _

Notes to the Installing contractor The purpose of this form Is for you, the contractor to fill In all vendors that are !BC compliant as part of your initial submission for any group of equipment, I.e., fans, ac units, pumps, etc. It Is acceptable to submit vendors that will be compliant as long as a factory letter Is Issued stating full compliance will occur at time of shipment. Only IBC compliant vendors can participate on this project. In the event that no vendor In any group Is !BC compliant, this information must be submitted to the project's MEP for approval.

Manufacturer lBC Compliant

Yes No

Signature Print Name


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


MOTORS SECTION 15170·1

A. Common requirements for electric motors furnished on equipment specified in other Sections, including single phase and three phase electric motors.


A. All mechanical sections with motor driven equipment


C. Section 15010 Project Finalization

D. Section 15970 Energy Management and Control Systems

E. Section 15971 Variable Frequency Drives

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code



1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to UL Component Recoguition for appropriate sizes

B. Conform to NFPA 70 and applicable State energy code

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HAI\'OLING (REFER TO SECTION 15(00)

A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MAI\'UFACTURERS (REFER TO SECTION 15000);

A. Allis Chalmers

B. Century

C. Baldour

1339

CAMPUS OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

D. Marathon

E. General Electric

F. Westinghouse

,2.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

MOTORS SECTION 15170 • 2

A. Motors less than 250 Watts, for intermittent service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.

B. Motors which are to be controlled from a variable frequency drive shall be designed and constructed for full compatibility with the drive.

C. Electrical Service:

1. Unless indicated otherwise on equipment schedules, motors shall be supplied as with the following electrical characteristics:

a. Motors Y, horsepower and smaller: 115 single phase, 60 Hz b. Motors larger than Yo horsepower shalI be three phase and shall be rated as specified

and scheduled

D. Design for continuous operation in 104 OF environment.

E. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG I limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

F. Visible Nameplate: Indicating manufacturer's name and model number, motor horsepower, RPM, frame size, voltage, phase, cycles, full load amps, insulation system class, service factor, maximum ambient temperature, temperature rise at rated horsepower, minimum efficiency.

G. Nominal Efficiency: To NEMA MG I to meet or exceed required efficiency ofthe State energy code.

H. Invertor Duty Motors (For Use with Variable Frequency Drives):

1. Provide where scheduled on the drawings 2. Motors shall meet NEMA MG-l Part 31 requirements. Nameplates shall state motors are

"invertor duty". Motors shall be suitable for variable torque and have a 10:1 speed ratio.

I. Wiring Terminations:

I. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.

2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame.

2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque

B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COl>fMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings

MOTORS SECTION 15170 - 3

D. Open Drip-proof and Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class F insulation, rated for 311°F maximum temperature, NEMA Service Factor, pre lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque

B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current

C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 % offullload torque

D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 % of full load torque

E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-startlcapacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.

F. Drip-proof and Enclosed Motor Enclosures: Class F insulation, rated for 311°F maximum temperature, NEMA Service Factor, pre lubricated sleeve or ball bearings.

2.S THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL-CAGE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Between I and I V. times full load torque

B. Starting Current; Six times full load current

C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics

D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors

E. Insulation System: NEMA Class F or better

F. NEMA Service Factor

G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay with wiring to terminal box.

L Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-1 0 life of200,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end ofNEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.

J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1

K. Weatherproof Epoxy (where indicated) Motors: Epoxy coat windings with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS CO:l-IPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014.226

2.6 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS (MOTOR STARTERS)

MOTORS SECTION 15170·4

A. Enclosed Motor Controllers (starters) and switches are not under Division 15 unless specifically specified with a particular mechanical equipment item.

1. Exception: Variable frequency drives furnished under Section 15970.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install securely on firm foundation. MOllnt ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.

B. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

C. Motor starters and disconnects are not installed or furnished under Division 15 unless specified or scheduled to be factory furnished and mounted with a particular mechanical equipment item. Starters which are furnished with a particular mechanical equipment item but are shipped loose are not installed or wired under Division 15.

D. Variable frequency drives are furnished by Section 15970 in accordance with Section 15971, with installation and power wiring by Division 16.

1. Exception: Drives shaH be factory furnished, mounted and wired by associated equipment manufacturer when specified.

E. Application

I. Open drip-proof except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled where exposed to weather or moisture. 3. Single phase motors:

a. Shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type b. Fans, pumps, air compressors: capacitor start type.

4. Three phase motors:

a. Squirrel·cage type

F. NEMA Open Motor Service Factor Schedule HP 1800 RPM Motor

1/6 to 113 1.35 liz to% 1.25 to 150 1.15


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Ceiling Tacks

B. Nameplates

C. Pipe Markers

D. Tags

E. TagChart


A. Division 15 Piping, Valves, Equipment, and Control Sections


C. Section 15005 - Sustainable Building Construction

D. Section 15996 - Commissioning

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME Al 3.1· Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

1.4 SUSTAINABLE BIDLDINGS

MECHANICAL IDENTIFlCATION SECTION 15190· J



A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification of all systems and equipment.

B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each produet required.


A. Include valve tag identification schedule.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING TACKS

A. Description: Steel with % inch diameter color coded head.

1339


B. Color code as follows:

1. HV AC equipment: Yellow 2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red 3. Plumbing valves: Green 4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue

2.2 NAMEPLATES

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 15190 - 2

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on black background

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers: (Refer to Section 15000):

1. W.H. Brady 2. Seton 3. Marking Services, Inc.

B. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.l

C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated; flexible; semi-rigid plastic; preformed to fit around pipe Or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl fllm tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

E. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape; minimum 6 inch wide by 4 roll thick; metallic tracer wire, manufactured for direct burial service.

2.4 TAGS

A. Description: Brass or Aluminum with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1 V:t inch diameter with smooth edges.

2.5 TAG CHART

A. Description: Typewritten letter size list in aluminum frame, plastic laminated. Chart shall include valve number, service and location.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surHices to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Provide identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

1339


3.3 NAMEPLA TESILABELS

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 15190 - 3

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

B. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

3.4 PIPE MARKERS

A. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below fmished grade, directly above buried pipe.

3.5 TAGS

A. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Identify all scheduled equipment (rooftop makeup air units, gas-fire duct furnaces, gas-fired unit heaters, packaged rooftop units, fans, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, etc.) and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identifIed with tags.

B. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

C. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

D. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

E. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure (when applicable). Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

F. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Mark reflected ceiling plans with ceiling tiles that are to be lifted to service equipment and associated equipment located above the tiles.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION lNCLUDES

A. Flexible Duct Connections


A. Division 3


C. Section 15140 - Supports, Anchors, Curbs, Seals, and Flashings

D. Section 15145 - Seismic Provisions

E. Section 15624 -Indirect Fired Air Units

F. Section 15870 - Power Ventilators

1.3 REFERENCES

A. 1999 ASHRAE Handbook, Vibration Isolation

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as indicated.

1. 400 - 600 rpm: 3.5 inch 2. 601 ·800 rpm: 2 inch 3. 801 - 900 rpm: 1 inch 4. 901 - 1500 rpm: 0.5 inch 5. Over 1500 rpm: 0.2 inch


VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 15245 - 1

A. Product Information: Provide material and 1ype of construction. Provide schedule of vibration isolator 1ype with location and load on each.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and setting dimensions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL ISOLATORS


1. Amber Booth 2. Kinetics 3. Korfund 4. Mason Industries

1339


VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 15245 - 2

5. Isolators provided by the manufacturer of isolated equipment as an accessory to that equipment are acceptable when indicated in these specifications or on the drawings to be provided with isolation equipment as an accessory to the equipment.

2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers (Refer to Section J 5000):

J. Ventfabrics 2. Duro Dyne

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

I. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 26 ounces{yard2

• Rated for -20 of to 200 of for standard, non-corrosive, indoor applications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide isolation for all motor driven equipment furnished in this project:

1. Exceptions:

a. In-line circulating pumps b. Ceiling mounted exhaust fans c. Curb mounted roof exhausters

C. Install spring hangers without binding.

D. Connect wiring to isolated equipment with flexible hanging loop.

E. Provide flexible duct connector between exhaust fan and ductwork and between roof mounted air units and ductwork.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cellular Foam

B. Glass Fiber

C. Inserts and Shields - Installation

D. Jackets and Fitting Covers


A. Section 15000 Basic Mechanical Requirements

B. Section 15010 Project Finalization


D. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification

E. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping

F. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties

1.3 REFERENCES

A. General

PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15260 - 1

I. ASTM E84 • Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

2. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 3. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials 4. UL 123· Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

B. Cellular Foam

1. ASTM C534 • Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Blastomenc Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

2. ASTM Dl 056 • Standard Specification fur Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber

C. Glass Fiber

1. ASTM C547 • Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation

D. Jackets and Fitting Covers

I. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

1339



2. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

3. ASTM Dl784 - Standard SpecifIcation for Rigid PolyVinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds Chlorinated PolyVinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds

1.4 SUSTAINABLE BIDLDINGS



A. For each insulation type, provide material characteristics, minimum and maximum service temperatures, moisture absorption characteristics, thermal and vapor transmission characteristics.

B. Provide a schedule indicating insulation type and thickness for all pipe sizes of all piping systems.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work ofthis section with minimum three (3) years documented experience and who is authorized by the manufacturer.


A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA255, and UL 723.

1.S DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with Section 15000.

B. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.

1.9 ENVmONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of twenty-four (24) hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CELLULAR FOAM


1. Armstrong, Armaflex-AP 2. Halstead

B. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible; cellular elastomeric; molded or sheet; k factor: ASTM C177, 0.27 Btu·inl(hft2 .oF) at 75 OF; -70 OF minimum service temperature; 220 OF maximum service

1339



temperature; maximum moisture absorption: ASTM DI056, 5.0 percent (pipe) by weight; 6.0 percent (sheet) by volume; moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96, 0.10 perm-inches.

C. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier contact adhesive compatible with the insulation. Armstrong 520 adhesive or approvad equal.

2.2 GLASS FIBER


I. Schuller, Micro-Lok, AP-T Plus 2. Knauf 3. Owens Coming

B. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded; noncombustible; k factor: ASTM C177, 0.24 Btu·inJ(h·ft,·oF) at 75 of; 850 OF maximum service temperature; 0.2 percent maximum moisture absorption by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn; bonded to aluminized film with pressure sensitive tape lap sealing system; moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perminches.

D. Provide with GreenGuard Certification for Children and Schools.

2.3 JACKETS AND FITTING COVERS

A. PVC Plastic Jacket and Fitting Covers (Interior Applications):

I. Manufacturers (Refer to Section l5000):

a. Zeston 2000

2. Jackets and fitting covers: ASTM Dl784; one piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material; off-white color; minimum service temperature: 0 OF; maximum service temperature: 450 OF; thickness: 20 mil.

3. Jackets and fitting covers (vapor barrier jackets): ASTM D 1784; one piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material; off-white color; minimum service temperature: 0 OF; maximum service temperature: 450 OF; moisture vapor transmission - ASTM E96 - 0.002 perm-inches; thickness: 20 mil.

4. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape

B. Inserts and Shields

\339

I. Inserts: Heavy density insulation which will not crush from weight of pipe. Locate between shield and pipe. Inserts are furnished in this Section 15260 and installed in Section 15140.

2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and insulation. Shields are furnished and installed under Section 15140.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO.10I4·lZ6

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION - GENERAL


A. Verify that piping has been tested and approved before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INST ALLA TION - GENERAL

A. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.

B. On exposed piping in finished areas, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

C. Insulate pipes in accordance with the insulation schedule.

D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections and expansion joints.

E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier for pipes conveying fluids 1800 F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.

F. InstalI materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms and in Finished Spaces less than 10 feet above finished floor: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.

H. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

I. Insulation on al1 cold water systems shal1 be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Do not allow hangers, supports, anchors etc., to come in direct contract with the pipe.

J. Insulate entire system including fittings, unions and flexible connections, flanges and expansion joints. For insulation of valves and other pieces ofequipment, see Section 15280. At fire separations, Refer to Section 0784 I - Fire Stopping.

K. Heat Traced Piping; Insure that any required heat trace is installed prior to insulation. Heat trace is not provided under Division 15. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

3.3 CELLULAR FOAM INSULATION

A. Cover pipe and fittings with insulation in thickness scheduled.

B. Insulation shall fit in snug contact with pipe and be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Slip insulation on tubing before tubing sections and fittings are assembled keeping slitting of insulation to a minimum.

D. Seal joints in insulation with adhesive.

1339


E. Insulate fittings with pre-molded covers or sheet insulation.

F. Stagger joints on layered insulation.


G. Insulation exposed outside shall have "slit" joint seams places on the bottom side of the pipe.

H. Paint exterior exposed insulation with two coats of gray finish recommended by the Insulation manufacturer to protect from weather and sunlight.

r. Buried piping: insulate with molded fitting covers.

3.4 GLASS FIBER INSULATION

A. Cover pipe with glass fiber insulation in thickness scheduled.

B. When vapor barrier is required, adhere factory applied vapor barrier jacket lap smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with pressure sensitive strip. Adhere self-sealing butt joint strips over end joints. No staples will be allowed.

C. Insulate fittings and joints with molded insulation of like material and thickness of adjacent pipe with ends of insulation tucked snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in.

D. Cover insulation with one piece PVC fttting covers.

3.5 JACKETS AND FITTING COVERS

A. Indoor, concealed pipes above ambient temperature: Standard jacket; with Or without vapor barrier; factory-applied.

B. Indoor, concealed pipes below ambient temperature: Vapor barrier jacket: factory-applied.

C. Indoor, exposed applications: Standard or vapor barrier jacket in accordance with concealed applications; covered with PVC jacket.

D. Secure with stainless steel tacks and wrap seams and tacks with vinyl tape.

3.6 INSERTS AND SHIELDS

A. Inserts: Heavy density insulation which will not crush from weight of pipe. Locate between shield and pipe. Inserts are furnished in this Section 15260 and installed in Section 15140.

B. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and insulation. Shields are furnished and installed under Section 15140.

3.7 ROOF DRAIN SUMPS

A. Insulate with fiberglass batt sealed with tape and adhesive vapor tight.

3.8 HANDICAPPED FIXTURES

A. All exposed hot and drain piping at Handicap fixtures shall be insulated with a neatly installed removable type ADA - approved insulation kit equal to Basin Guard, PorWrap, etc.

1339


PART 4 SCHEDULES

4.1 SEE SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS

1339

PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15260 • 6



PART 1 GENERAL


A. Aluminum Jackets

B. Cell ular Foam

C. Glass Fiber

D. Lace·On Blankets



B. Section 150 I 0 - Project Finalization



1.3 REFERL"ICES

A. General

EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 15280 - 1

I. ASTM E84 • Standard Test Method for Surfltce Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

2. ASTM E96 • Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 3. NFPA 255· Standard Method of Test ofSurfuce Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials 4. UL 723 • Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

B. Aluminum Jackets

I. ASTM B2091209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

C. Cellular Foam

1. ASTMC335




A. For each insulation type, provide material characteristics, minimum and maximum service temperatures, moisture absorption characteristics, thennal and vapor transmission characteristics.

B. Provide a schedule indicating insulation type and thickness for all equipment to receive insulation.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STAn; PROJECT NO. 2014·226



A. Manufacturer QualifIcations: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and who is approved by manufacturer.


A. Conform to flame spread/smoke developed rating of25150 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (REFER TO SECTION 15000)

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

1.9 ENVlRONMENTALREQUlREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after instaHation for minimum period of twenty-four (24) hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM JACKETS


1. Childers 2. Pabco

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209; thickness: 0.020 inch sheet; finish: embossed; joining: longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps; metal jacket bands: 3/8 Inch wide, 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

2.2 CELLULAR FOAM


I. Armstrong, Armaflex-AP 2. Halstead

B. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet; k filetor: ASTM CI77; 0.27 Btu·inl(h·ftl.OF) at 75 OF; minimum service temperature: -70 OF; maximum service temperature: 220 OF; maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D1056; 5.0 % (pipe) by weight, 6.0 % (sheet) by volume; moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.10 perm-inches.

1339


EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 15280-3

C. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier contact adhesive compatible witb the insulation. Annstrong 520 adhesive or approved equal.

2.3 GLASS FIBER


1. Schuller· Pipe and Tank Insulation 2. Owens Coming

B. Insulation: Semi· rigid, noncombustible; k factor: ASTM C335 0.27 Btu·in/(h·ft2.0F) at 75 OF; maximum service temperature: 650 OF; density: 3.0 pounds/fool'.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper witb giass fiber yam, bonded to aluminized film with pressure sensitive tape lap sealing system; moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perminches.

2.4 REUSABLE VALVE COVERS

A. Manufacturers (Refer to Section 20 10 00):

1. No Sweat Valve Wraps

B. Insulation shall have a minimum k- factor .26, using fiberglass blanket. Flame and smoke spread shall be 25/50 per ASTM E-84.

C. Outer jacket shall be made of material equal to DuPont Tychem® QC, overlapping and completely covering the insulation witb seams joined by tabs made from hook and loop fasteners (Velcro). Butt ends shall have sewn- in-place elastic.

D. Outer jacket shall overlap adjoining sections of pipe insulation.

E. Installation shall not require the use of any special hand tools.

F. Suitable for continuous operation at 200 degrees Fahrenheit.

2.5 LACE-ON BLANKETS


1. Insulation

a. Kaowool Cerablanket

2. Fabric

a. JP Stevens Glass-Tex Fabric Sty Ie 9987 b. Alpha Maritex Style 3200-SA

B. Materials: 0.008 inch thick type 304 stainless steel knitted wire mesh inner liner 8 pounds/foot' density insulation, Y, inch thick; oil and water resistant exterior protective fabric.

C. Construction: Blankets shall be sewn together. Lacing anchors shall be 2:1, inch stainless steel secured with 12 gauge stainless steel washers. Blankets shall have stainless steel wire installed for draw cords.

1339


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 15280·4

A. VeriJY that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

I. Provide materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate. 3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 4. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around with a mastic. Do not

insulate over. 5. Exposed Equipment in Finished Areas: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible

locations. 6. Valves: Insulate with reusable valve covers. 7. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Insulate with Lace-On

Blanket.

a. Install in single or multiple layers to match scheduled insulation thickness. b. Blankets shall be removable and re-useable.

8. Cover field insulated tanks with aluminum jackets.

B. Cellular Foam

I. Cover equipment in thickness scheduled. 2. Insulation shall fit in snug contact with equipment and be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Seal joints in insulation with adhesive. 4. Stagger joints on layered insulation. 5. Paint exterior exposed insulation with two coats of gray finish recommended by the

Insulation Manufacturer to protect from weather or sunlight.

3.3 GLASS FIBER

A. Cover equipment with glass fiber insulation in thickness scheduled.

B. Provide vapor barrier jackets. Adhere factory applied vapor barrier jacket lap smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with pressure sensitive strip_ Adhere self-sealing butt joint strips over end joints. No staples will be allowed.

3.4 REUSABLE VALVE COVERS

A. Install reusable valve covers on valves, balancing devices, strainers, unions, flow meters and other pipe mounted devices requiring service and maintenance.

B. Install in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and maintain continuous vapor barrier with the pipe insulation.

1339


C. Outer jacket shall overlap adjoining sections of pipe insulation.

3.5 LACE-ON BLANKETS


A. Install in single or multiple layers to match scheduled insulation thickness for associated piping system.

B. Blankets shall be removable and reusable.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing equipment, pressure tanks, softeners, filters, etc., not factory insulated, shall be insulated under this section.

B. Expansion tanks and similar equipment not receiving fluid directly from the system do not require insulation.

C. Valves, traps, pressure reducing valves, pumps, etc.: Extend insulation 6 inches beyond flanges.

D. Systems Above Ambient Temperature: 2 inch thick glass fIber insulation with vapor barrier.

E. All equipment requiring access for maintenance, repair or cleaning shall be insulated with lace-on blankets.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Glass fiber, Flexible Blanket (Duct Wrap)

B. Glass Fiber, Flexible (Duct Liner)




C. Section 15890- Ductwork

1.3 REFERENCES

A. General

DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 15290 - 1

1. ASrn C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

2. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation 3. ASTMC665 4. ASrn E84 - Standard Test Method for Surfuce Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials 5. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 6. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Snrface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant

Heat Energy Source 7. ASTM G2l - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials

to Fungi 8. ASTMG22 9. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials 10. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible II. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

B. Glass fiber, Flexible Blanket (Duct Wrap)

l. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thennal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications

C. Glass Fiber, Flexible (Duct Liner)

I. ASTM CI 07 I - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material)



1339



A. General


I. For each insulation type, provide material characteristics, minimum and maximum service temperatures, moisture absorption characteristics, thermal and vapor transmission characteristics.

2. Provide a schedule indicating insulation type and thickness for each specific duct system and installation type.


A. General

L Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

2. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and who is approved by manufacturer.


A. General

1. Conform to flame spread/smoke developed rating of25150 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.

2. Material packaging shall be clearly UL labeled for the intended purpose.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HA,'IDLlNG

A. In accordance with Section 15000.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of twenty-four (24) hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE BLANKET (DUCT WRAP)


1. Schuller, R-Series Microlite 2. Certainteed; Standard Ductwrap

1339

----------- ----


3. Knauf; Ductwrap 4. Owens Corning; All Service Ductwrap


B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket; k factor: ASTM C518, 0.29 Btu·inl(h·ft2.oF) at 75 of, 0.042 (W/(mK) at 24 'C; maximum service temperature: 250 of; maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 % by volume; density: 0.75 pounds/foot', 12.0 kg/m'; resistance to microbial growth: ASTM C665; shall not support mold, bacteria, or fungus growth.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Foil Scrim Kraft (FSK); foil thickness: 0.00035 inches; moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm 0.029 ng/(sxmxPa); Class I vinyl; vinyl thickness: 0.0032 inches; moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 1.3 perm 1.9 ng/(sxmxPa); vapor barrier tape: same material as vapor barrier jacket as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE (DUCT LINER)


1. Knauf - Duct Liner E-M 2. Certainteed - Toughgard 3. Schuller - Permacote Linacoustic

B. Insulation: ASTM C1071; flexible, noncombustible bonded glass fiber blanket with a black mat! faced surface for damage resistance; k factor: ASTM CIO?I, maximum 0.28 Btu·inl(h·ft2.oF) at 75 OF; maximum service temperature: 250 OF; maximum rated air velocity on coated air side: 4,000 fpm; surface coating with EPA registered anti-microbial agent that will not support growth offungus or bacteria; anti-microbial agent shall be tested in accordance with: fungi test ASTM C665, fungi test ASTM G21, bacterial test ASTM G22.

C. Adhesive:


a. DuroDyne; WBG b. Miracle; PF96 c. Scotchgrip Insulation Adhesive; 4230

2. Waterproof, ASTM E 162 fire-retardant type

D. Mechanical Fasteners:

1339

I. Conform to SMACNA Mechanical Fastener Standard MF-I-1975

a. Manufacturers (Refer to Section 15000): b. DuroDyne c. Omark dished head "Insul-Pins" d. Grip nails may be used if nail is installed by "Grip Nail Air Hammer" or by

"Automatic Fastener Equipment" in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

CAMPUS OPERATIO?llS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

DUCTWORK INSULATION SECfION 15290·4

A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials_

B. VerifY that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

I. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, latest edition.

B. Glass Fiber, Flexible Blanket (Duct Wrap)

1. Provide glass fiber, flexible insulation (blanket type) as scheduled. 2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 3. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, and expansion joints. 4. Wrap insulation tightly (avoid over compressing) on ductwork with all points butted. Adhere

insulation to the ductwork with 4 inch strip of bonding adhesive on 8 inch centers. 5. Overlap all joints and completely seal with vapor barrier tape. 6. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where

necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 7. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 8. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation

without disturbing wrapping. Seal and bevel the ends ofthe insulation.

C. Glass Fiber, Flexible (Duct Liner)

I. Provide glass fiber duct liner, fleXible, as scheduled. 2. Install matt faced sur:fttce facing the air stream side. Adhere insulation with fire resistive

adhesive for 100 % coverage. 3. Accurately cut liner, point all joints, and thoroughly coat connecting ends with fire resistive

adhesive, Butt joints tightiy_ Top and bottom sections of insulation shall overlap sides. All exposed edges shall be sealed (buttered).

4. lfinsulation is installed without horizontal, longitudinal, and end joints sealed and buttered together, installation will be rejected and work removed and replaced with work that conforms to this specification.

5. When two or more layers of liner board are required, joints shall be staggered. 6. Sccure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA Standards for spacing. 7. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 8. Duct dimensions indicated on the plans are gross outside dimensions. Thickness of duct liner

has been considered in sizing the ductwork. Do not increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.

PART 4 TABLES

4.1 SCHEDULES

A. See schedule on drawings.

1339


1339




PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping, Buried

B. Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping, Above Grade

C. Storm Water Piping (Roof and Overflow Drainage), Above Grade

D. Storm Water Piping (Roof and Overflow Drainage), Buried

E. Natural Gas Piping, Above Grade

F. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings

G. General Valves

H. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves

I. Strainers

J. Flow Control Balance Valves

K. Gas Pressure Regulators

L. Access Doors

M. Domestic Water Piping, Above Grade

N. Domestic Water Piping, Buried


A. Division 8


C. Section 15010 - Project Finalization

D. Section 1505 I Excavation and Backfill

E. Section 15140 - Supports, Anchors, Curbs, Seals, and Flashings

F. Section 15145 -Seismic Provisions

G. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification

H. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

I. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation

J. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties

1339

PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 - 1

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIM.4. VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014.226

1.3 REFERENCES

A. General

1. ASME B31.1 • Power Piping 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping 3. ASME SEC IX· Welding and Brazing Qualifications 4. ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through·Penetration Fire Stops 5. ASTM F708· Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers 6. A WWA C651 . Disinfecting Water Mains

PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410·2

7. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer 8. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports· Selection and Application 9. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices 10. NCPWB - Procedure Specifications for Pipe Welding 11. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops

B. ABS Piping

1. ASTM 02235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

2. ASTM 02661 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

3. ASTM 02751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 4. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

C. Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings

1. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800 2. ASMEBI6.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250 3. ASTM A 74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 4. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 5. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems 6. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems

D. Copper Piping

1. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 2. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal; A WS AS.8 - Brazing Filler Metal 3. ASTM B75 (ASTM B75M) • Seamless Copper Tube 4. ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M) - Seamless Copper Water Tube 5. A WS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal

E. Natural Gas Piping

I. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping; NFPA 54 • National Fuel Gas Code 2. ASTM 02513 - Thennoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 3. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code

F. Ductile Iron Piping

I. ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings

1339


PLUMBING PIPING SECI'ION 15410 - 3

2. A WWA CIOS - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids

3. A WWA ClIO - Ductile - Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings 3 inches through 48 inches, for Water and Other Liquids

4. A WWA CI II - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

5. AWWA Cl51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds Or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids

G. PVC Piping

1. ASTM 02564 - Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings 2. ASTM 02665 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent PIpe and

Fittings 3. ASTM 02729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 4. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and

Fittings 5. ASTM 03034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 6. ASTM F437 - Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,

Schedule 80 7. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 8. ASTM F679 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and

Fittings 9. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inches Through 12 inches for

Water Distribution

H. PEX Piping

l. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. ASTM EI19 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 3. ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops 4. ASTM F876 Standard Specification for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing 5. ASTM F877 Standard Specification for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and

Cold-Water Distribution Systems 6. ASTM Fl960 Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing

Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing 7. ANSIINSF Standard 14 Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials 8. ANSIINSF Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects 9. ANSIIUL 263 Standard for Safety for Fire Tests ofBuiIding Construction and Materials. 10. CAN/CSA B137.5: CroSS-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing Systems for Pressure

applications. II. International Plumbing Code (lPe) 12. ICC Evaluation Service (ES) Evaluation Report No ESR 1099 13. 1993 BOCA National Plumbing Code 14. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 15. National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC) 16. HUD Material Release No. 1269 17. PPI Technical Report TR-4/06

1. Steel Piping

1. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless

1339

CAMPUS OPERA TlONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226


2. ASTM A234/A234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures

J. General Valves

1. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves 2. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 3. MSS SP-71 • Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 4. MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 5. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves 6. MSS SP-&5 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 7. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared

Ends

K. Gas Shutoff Valves

1. AGA Z21.22 - Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems



1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state regulations.

C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.

D. PEX Piping: Installers shall attend manufacturer onsite training.

1.7 REGULA TORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate and comply with serving utility company requirements.

B. Installation and materials of underground pipe, including service piping, if required, shall be as directed by serving utility company.

C. Include applicable utility company charges - See Section 15000.

1.8 TESTING

A. Sanitary Waste, Vent, and Storm Water Piping

1339



I.

2. 3.

Test all building sanitary sewer, vent and stonn water (RoofDrainagefSite Drainage) piping to ensure system is water tight. Drainage piping shall be tested to the point of connection to mains outside the building. Water test: The water test shall be applied to the drainage and vent systems either in its entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than a 10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 10 feet of the system shall have been submitted to a test of less than 10 feet heat of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least fifteen minutes before inspection starts. TIle system shall then be tight at all points. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative.

B. Water Piping

I. Upon completion of a section or of the entire hot and cold water supply system, it shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure not less than the working pressure under which it is to be used or 100 psig whichever is greater. The water used for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply. A fifty (50) pound per square inch (344.5 kPa) air pressure may be substituted for the water test. In either method of test, the piping shall withstand the test without leaking for a period of not less than thirty (30) minutes. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Test water piping to connection point at main outside the building.

C. Natural Gas Piping

I. Gas piping shall be tested and made tight in accordance with the latest edition of the Unifonn Plumbing Code and any other governing local gas codes.

D. Records

I. Provide record of pipe tests in accordance with Section 15010. 2. Include certificate of Tests in O&M Manual. 3. Include certificate of Health Department approval of domestic water quality in O&M Manual.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

E. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Piping Storage Protection:

1339

1. Store materials protected from exposure to hannful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

CAMPUS OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKI;\1A VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226


2. Store piping in cartons or under cover to avoid dirt or foreign material from being introduced into the tubing.

3. Do not expose piping to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. If construction delays are encountered, provide cover to portions of tubing exposed to direct sunlight.

4. Piping Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

1.10 DRAWING SCHEDULES

A. Refer to schedules on drawings for model numbers, symbols, etc. for additional information concerning products specified in this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. This specifIcation applies to piping outside of scope of part 2.2 ofthis specification.

B. ABS Pipe: ASTM D2661 or ASTM D275I (Schedule 40)

1. Fittings: ABS 2. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM 02665 or ASTM D3034 (Schedule 40)

1. Fittings: PVC 2. Joints: ASTM 02855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement

2.2 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight

1. Fittings: Cast iron 2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum

B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight

I. Fittings: Cast iron 2. Joints: CISPI 310, nenprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies

C. No-hub couplings

L Approved Manufacturers (refer to Section 15000):

a. Husky SD 2000 b. Clam-All Hi Torque 80

2. Materials: The worm gear drive clamps shall have a hexagon head to accept a 5116 inch socketed torque wrench. The gaskets shall be manufactured using neoprene rubber meeting the requirements of ASTM C-564. Sealing rings shall be molded into the gasket and positioned under each torquing band. Couplings shall meet the performance requirements of coupling standard FM 1680 class 1.

1339


3. Corrugated Couplings

PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-7

a. Shield constructed of304 corrugated stainless steel with a minimtun thickness of 0.010".

b. Coupling pipe sizes 1 \4" through 4" shall have 4 bands. c. Couplings for pipe sizes 5" through 10" shall have 6 bands.

4. Smooth shielded couplings shall have a 304 stainless steel shield with a minimtun shield thickness of 28 gauge.

a. Couplings sizes I 1/2" through 4" shall have 2 bands b. Couplings sizes 5" through 10" shall have 4 bands.

O. ABS Pipe: ASTM 02661 (MaintenancelShoplParking Building Only)

1. Fittings: ABS 2. Joints: ASTM 02235, solvent weld

E. PVC Pipe: ASTM 02729 or ASTM 02665 (MaintenancelShoplParking Building Only)

I. Fittings: PVC 2. Joints: ASTM 02855, solvent weld with ASTM 02564 solvent cement

2.3 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, hard drawn, Type K

I. Fittings: ASME B 16.22 wrought copper and bronze 2. Joints: A WS A5.S, BCuP silver braze

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, annealed, Type K

I. Fittings: none 2. Joints: none

C. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA CISI

I. Fittings: AWWA CliO, Ductile iron, standard thickness 2. Joints: A WW A CIII, rubber gasket with % inch diameter rods

2.4 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn

I. Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought copper and bronze 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA

B. PEX Piping with Pro-Pex Fittings (up to and including 1-114")

1. Manufacturer (Refer to Section 15000):

a. Uponor(Wirsbo), AquaPex

2. Tubing

1339

CAJ'\fPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226


a. Material: Pre-insulated cross linked polyethylene (PEX) manufactured by PEX-a or Engel method

b. Material Standard: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and tested for compliance by an independent third party agency

c. Standard grade hydrostatic design and pressure ratings from PPI d. Fire-rated assembly listings in accordance with ANS[·UL 263

1) UL Design No. L557 - I-hour wood frame floor/ceiling assemblies 2) UL Design No. K913 - 2-hour concrete floor/ceiling assemblies 3) UL Design No. U372 - I-hour wood stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies 4) UL Design No. V444 - I-hour steel stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies

e. Note: PEX piping and fittings shall be listed for installation in return air plenums as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. (Flame spread 25 or less/smoke developed 50 or less). There are installation limitations and procedures that are required in order to meet the above flame/smoke ratings. Consult manufacturer guidelines.

f. Piping and fittings shall meet NSF Standard 61 Drinking Water Requirements. g. Minimum Bend Radius (cold bending): No less than six times the outside diameter.

Use a bend support as supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer for tubing with a bend radius less than stated.

h. Nominal Inside Diameter: Provide tubing with nominal inside diameter, in accordance with ASTM F876 as indicated.

1) 3/8 inch 2) Y, inch 3) % inch 4) 1 inch

3. Fittings

a. Material: Fitting assembly is manufactured from material listed ASTM FI960 b. Material Standard. Comply with ASTM F 1960 c. Type: Uponor ProPEX Engineered Polymer (EP) fittings.

4. Manifolds

a. Material

1) Type L copper body with UNS 3600 series brass ProPEX outlet connections 2) Engineered Plastic (EP) body with ProPEX outlet connections.

5. Accessories

1339

a. Bend supports designed for maintaining tight radius bends are supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

b. ProPEX expander tool to install the ASTM F1960 compatible fittings are supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

c. The tubing manufacturer provides clips and/or PEX rails for supporting tubing runs. d. AU horizontal tubing hangers and riser clamps are epoxy-coated materiaL e. Furnish Owner with new expander tool at the completion of project, if PBX piping is

utilized on the project. If project pipe sizes require different tools, provide one of each.



2.5 STORM WATER PIPING, (ROOF DRAINAGE; RDL AND ODL) BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. ABS Pipe: ASTM 02680 or ASTM 02751 (Schedule 40)

1. Fittings: ABS 2. Joints: ASTM 02235, solvent weld

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM 02665 (Schedule 40)

1. Fittings: PVC 2. Joints: ASTM 02855, solvent weld with ASTM 02564 solvent cement

2.6 STORM WATER PIPING, (ROOF DRAINAGE; RDL Al'lfD ODL) ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight

1. Fittings: Cast iron 2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system

B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight

1. Fittings: Cast iron 2. Joints: CISPl31 0, Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies

C. No-hub couplings

I. Approved Manufacturers (refer to Section 15000):

a. Husky SO 4000 b. Clam-All Hi Torque 80

2. Materials: The worm gear drive clamps shall have a hexagon head to accept a 5/16 inch socketed torque wrench. The gaskets shall be manufactured using neoprene rubber meeting the requirements of ASTM C-564. Sealing rings shall be molded into the gasket and positioned under each torquing band. Couplings shall meet the performance requirements of coupling standard FM 1680 class 1.

3. Corrugated Couplings

a. Shield constructed of304 corrugated stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 0.0151".

b. Coupling pipe sizes I 11;" through 4" shall have 4 bands. c. Couplings for pipe sizes 5" through 10" shall have 6 bands.

4. Smooth shielded couplings shall have a 304 stainless steel shield with a minimum shield thickness of28 gauge.

a Couplings sizes 1 1/2" through 4" shall have 2 bands b. Couplings sizes 5" through 10" shall have 4 bands.

O. ABS Pipe: ASTM 02661 (Maintenance/ShoplParking Building Only)

1. Fittings: ABS

1339


2. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld

PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 -10

E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D2729 (Malntenance/ShopJParking Building Only)

1. Fittings: PVC 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement

2.7 KATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black

I. Fittings: ASME B 16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME Sec I

2.8 INDIRECT WASTE AND COOLIKG COIL COI\J)EKSATE DRAIN PIPING

A. TYpe M copper tubing with soldered joints. Min. size W'

2.9 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 inches and under:

I. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints

B. Pipe Size over 2 inches:

I. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier

2.10 GENERAL VALVES


I. Crane 2. Jenkins 3. Powell 4. Milwaukee 5. Grinnell 6. Stockham 7. Hammond 8. Nibco 9. Walworth 10. Watts

B. Gate Valves

I. Up to and including 2 inches:

1339



a. MSS SP-BO, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder or threaded ends

C. Globe Valves

1. Up to and including 2 inches:

a. MSS SP-80 Class 150, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, Teflon disc, solder or threaded ends

D. Ball Valves


a. MSS SP-II 0, Class ISO, 400 psi, bronze two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends with union.

E. Gas Stops


a. Butterfly ("Butterball") bronze body, lever handle, stainless steel disc and stem, vitron seal, 200 psi working pressure, MSS SP-67, AGA certified and UL listed for gas service.

2. 2 Y, inches and larger:

a. Square head stop, standard pattern, cast iron body and plug, non-lubricated, inert packing material, threaded ends with union. Hays No. 7005 or equal.

F. Plug Valves (Gas Shutoff Valves)

1. 2 Y, inches and larger:

a. MSS SP-78, 150 psi, cast iron body and plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends. Provide lever operator or wrench.

G. Swing Check Valves

I. Up to and including 2 inches:

a MSS SP-BO, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends

H. Spring Loaded Check Valves (Pump Discharge)

1339

1. Up to 2 inches:

a. Class 125, cast bronze. Stainless steel stem, Buna Disc, Teflon seat ring, beryllium copper spring, screwed ends


2.11 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Temperature and Pressure Relief:

1. Manufacturers (Refer to Section 15000):

a. Watts b. Wilkins c. Bell & Gossett

PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410·12

2. Tested under ANSI Z21.22 with ratings as certified and listed by A.G.A. and C.G.A., bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, tempemture relief maximum 210 OF, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labeled.

2.12 STRAINERS

A. Up to 2 inches:


a. Watts b. Wilkins c. Spirax Sarco

2. Threaded brass body for 125 psi, at 400 of, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen

2.13 FLOW CONTROL BALANCE VALVES (CIRCUIT SETTERS):


I. Bell and Gossett "Circuit Setter Plus" 2. Taco 3. Armstrong

B. Calibrated, plug type balance valve with precision machined orifice, readout valves equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps, calibrated nameplate and indicating pointer-Brass Or bronze body.

2.14 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS


1. Fisher 2. Jordan 3. Rockwell

B. Spring loaded with internal relief valve. Cast iron body rated for 150 psi (non operational) with screened vent.

C. Size, capacity and pressure requirements in accordance with drawings

1339


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 INSTALLATION -GENERAL


A. Provide pipe and valves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

D. Provide piping and all required offsets and fittings in order to coordinate with other trades, minimize structural interferences, conserve space and maintain headroom. Refer to Section 15000.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation ofinsulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15260.

H. Provide access doors where valves, strainers, regulators etc., are not exposed unless indicated to be provided under other Divisions. Access doors shall comply with Section 08311.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

K. Prepare exposed, unfmished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09910.

L. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 15051.

M. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

o. Provide supports, hangers, insulation shields, sleeves and inserts in accordance with Section 15140.

P. Valves shall be line size unless indicated otherwise.

Q. Hubless Piping: Clamps shall be tightened to 80 inch pound and installed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. ZOI4·ZZ6

3.3 INSTALLATION - PEX PIPING


A. Install AQUAPEX tubing in accordance with the tubing accordance with the tubing manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated in the installation handbook. Note: specific installation procedures are required to meet ASTM E84 flame and smoke requirements.

B. Do not install PEX tubing within 6 inches of gas appliance vents or within 12 inches of any recessed light fixtures.

C. Do not solder within 18 inches ofPEX tubing in the same waterline. Make sweat connections prior to making PEX connections.

D. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days.

E. Ensure no glues, solvents, sealants or chemicals come in contact with the tubing without prior permission from the tubing manufacturer.

F. Use grommets or sleeves at the penetrations for PBX tubing passing through metal studs.

G. Protect PBX tubing with sleeves where abrasion may occur.

H. Use strike protectors where PBX tubing penetrates a stud or joist and has the potential for being struck with a screw or nail.

I. Use tubing manufacturer-supplied bend supports where bends are less than six times the outside tubing dieter.

J. Minimum horizontal supports are installed not Jess than 32 inches between hangers in accordance with model plumbing codes and tbe installation handbook.

K. PBX riser installations require epoxy-coated riser clamps installed at tbe base of the ceiling per floor.

L. A mid-story support is required for riser applications.

3.4 INSTALLATION -GASPIPE

A. Gas pipe installed underground, through air plenums, in walls, and pipes 2Y, inches and larger shall have welded fittings and joints. Other pipe may have screwed or welded fittings.

B. Provide gas stops or plug valves on lines serving furnaces, unit heaters, duct heaters, water heaters and otber gas fired equipment adjacent to equipment on outside of eabinet and easily accessible.

C. Do not provide flexible gas connections and equipment connections unless rated for the use.

D. Install dirt leg with pipe cap, 6 inches long minimum, on eacb vertical gas pipe drop to equipment.

E. Gas pressure regulators, when installed inside, shall be vented to the outside with full size vent with screened discharge elbowed down. Vent piping shall be sized as follows: For distances from regulator to outside up to 50' use full vent size from the regulator. For distances from regulator to outside from 51' to 100' use one pipe size greater than full vent size from the regulator. For distances greater than 100' use two pipe sizes greater tban full vent size from the regulator.

1339


PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 -15

3.5 APPLICATION

A. Flanges / Unions:

1. Steel Pipe:

a. Threade~ pipe, 2 inches smaller: Install unions downstream of each valve with screwed joint upstream

b. Welded pipe, 2 Y, inches and larger: Flanged connections both sides of valve c. Use unions at final connection to each piece of equipment or apparatus having a

threaded pipe connection. d. Use flanges at final connection to e<lch pie~e of equipment or apparatus having a

flanged pipe connection.

2. Copper Pipe:

B. Threaded pipe: Install union downstream of each valve with screwed joint up stream. Use brass male adapters each side of valve.

b. Soldered pipe: No unions required either side ofvalve. c. Use unions at final connection to each piece of equipment or apparatus having a

threaded pipe connection. d. Use flanges at final connection to each piece of equipment or apparatus having a

flanged pipe connection.

3. Notes to above: Temperature control valves shall have unions and/or flanges at each port. Valves with screwed connections that cannot be rotated shall have unions on each side of valve. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.

B. Provide brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

C. Provide bailor butterfly valves for shut·off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. Note: BaH valves shall be limited to pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller.

D. Provide globe, bailor butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

E. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment, for pressure reducing valves and meters as indicated on drawings.

F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

G. Provide listed gas shutoff valves in natural gas systems for shut·off service.

H. Provide flow control balance valves (circuit setters) in domestic hot water recirculating systems where indicated.

l. Provide gate valves for main domestic water shutoff.

J. Provide isolation shutoff valves and unions at inlet and outlet sides of all water pressure reducing valves, and gas pressure regulators.

1339


3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES


A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to Y. inch/foot, 2 %, minimum unless indicated otherwise on drawings. Maintain gradients.

B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

3.7 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.

D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 % of outlets.

E. Maintain disinfectant in system for twenty-four (24) hours.

F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mglL, repeat treatment.

G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or l.0 mg/L.

H. Take samples no sooner than twenty-four (24) hours after flushing, from 10 % of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with A WWA C65l. Provide laboratory results to Owner's Representative. Obtain approval from local health department.

3.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide sanitary and storm sewer connections to sewer services outside the building as indicated. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

B. Provide new water service complete with approved backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves. Connect to water service outside the building as indicated.

C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter main shutoff valve and required regulators. Coordinate new service with local gas utility and include associated utility costs in Division 15.


1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO, 2014·226

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Backflow preventers

B. Cleanouts

C. Downspout nozzles

D. Floor drains

E. Frost Proof Wall Hydrants

F. Trench Drains

G. Interior hose bibs

H. Mixing valves

l. Roof and overflow drains

J. Trap primers

K. Trap primers, Electronic

L. Water hammer arrestors

M. Oil· Water Separator



B. Section 150 I 0 - Project Finalization


D. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation


F. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures

O. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment

1.3 REFERENCES

A. General:

I. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers

B. Backflow preventers:

1339

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15430 - 1



I. ASSE 10 12 - Backflow Preveniers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent 2. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle 3. A WW A C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double

Check Valve Types

C. Floor drains:

1. ANSIIASME AII2.6.3 - Floor Drains

D. Frost Proof Wall Hydrants:

I. ASSE IO 19 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types

E. Trench Drains

I. ANSIIASME A 1I2.6.3 - Trench Drains

F. Roof and overflow, parapet and canopy/cornice drains:

I. ASME A1I2.21.2 - Roof Drains

G. Water hammer arrestors:

r. ASME AIl2.26. I - Water Hammer Arrestors 2. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors




A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Operation Data: Indicate frequency oftreatment required for interceptors.

B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.


A. Record actual locations of cleanouts and equipment.


A. Accept specialties on site in original fuctory packaging. Inspec! for damage.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Frost Proof Wall Hydrants

1339


1. Supply two loose keys for outside hose bibbs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS


1. Watts 2. Febco 3. Wilkins


B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSIIASSE 1013; AWWA C506; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm fallure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.

C. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSIIASSE 1012; A WWA C506; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.

D. See schedule on drawings for additional types of Backflow prevention devices.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Manufucturers (Refer to Section 15000):

1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Wade

B. General: Cleanouts shall be heavy iron bodies with taper thread-bronze plugs. They shall be full size of the pipe to 4 inches and not less than 4 inches for larger pipe. Cleanout extensions shall have flush frames and brass removable cover plates. Extensions to floor shall be made by using 118 bends.

C. Floor Cleanouts: Coated cast iron body; scoriated heavy duty nickel bronze top; fully adjustable and secured to body; gasket sealed iron closure plug; Cleanouts in tiled terrazzo or similar paved floors: J.R. Smith #4180; Cleanouts installed in ceramic tile floors: J.R. Smith #4040; Cleanouls installed in floors with asphalt, vinyl or linoleum: J.R. Smith #4140.

I. Cleanouts in other finished areas shall have round tops. 2. Cleanouts installed above grade shall have flange and flashing clamp. 3. Cleanouts in carpeted areas shall be furnished with carpet marker: J.R. Smith #4160. 4. Cleanouts in unfinished areas shall have heavy duty cast iron covers. 5. All c!eanouts shall have vandal-proofscrews.

D. Wall Cleanouts: Coated cast iron cleanout tee; gasket sealed iron plug; shallow type; round, stainless steel wall cover with center vandal-proof screw.

E. Exposed Cleanouts: Lead seal plug with gasketed iron plug or tapped cast iron fitting with gasketed iron plug.

1339



F. Exterior Cleanouts: Cleanouts in sewers outside building proper shall be of 4 inch cast iron pipe brought up to finish grade with cast iron cap recessed y., inch in 18xl8x6 inch concrete block. Block shall have beveled edge and shall be set flush with top of finish grade. Cleanout shall be equal to J.R. Smith #4255.

2.3 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES



B. Bronze round with straight offset bottom section

2.4 FLOOR DRAINS


1. J .R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Wade

B. ANSI AI12.21.l; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange; weep holes; reversible clamping collar; refer to schedule on drawings for accessories.

2.5 FROST PROOF WALL HYDRANTS



B. ANSI/ASSE 1019; non·freeze; self-draining type with chrome plated polished bronze wall plate lockable recessed box; hose thread spout; T -handles removable key; and integral vacuum breaker

2.6 TRENCH DRAINS


1. Jay R. Smith ACO Drain 2. Poly Drain

B. Trench drain channels shall have interlocking joints and horizontal ribs to ensure a positive anchor in the encasement concrete. Properly fitting outlets, end caps and necessary catch basins and foul-air traps shall be included. See schedule and detail on drawings.

C. The grate shall be capable of being locked to the channel with removable lock downs.

2.7 INTERIOR HOSE BIBBS


1339

CAMPt:S OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

L J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Wade 4. Woodford

PLt:MBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15430 ·5

B. All brass construction with lock-shield, loose key, or wheel handle (see schedule on drawings) and stuffing box and replaceable disc. Hose bibbs shall have % inch inlet and % inch hose connection and shall be fitted with a non-removable vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011.

C. Hose bibbs in fmished areas shall be smooth, chrome plated with finish flanges.

D. Hose bibbs in unfinished areaS shall be rough brass finished.

2.8 MIXING VALVES


L Symmons 2. Leonard

B. Valve Assembly: All bronze and stainless steel components; Thermostatic action with bellows mounted out-of-water; Removable cartridge with strainers; Integral check stops; outlet valve and dial thermometer; All material rough chrome finish; Assembly to be furnished with wall bracket for exposed installation; See schedule on drawings.

2.9 ROOF AND OVERFLOW DRAINS


I. J .R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Wade

B. Roofand Overflow Drains: ANSI Al 12.21.2; lacquered cast iron body with sump; metal dome strainer; membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop; adjustable under deck clamp; roof sump receiver; coordinate with roofing type; refer to schedule on drawings. Overflow drains shall have 2 inch high dam.

2.10 TRAP PRIMERS


1. I.R. Smith Fig. 2699/S10ao F -72-A I 2. Zurn 3. Wade

B. Mechanical Type Primer: cast bronze construction with integral vacuum breaker or air break.

C. Flush valve adapter trap primer assembly: chrome plated tubing; compression fittings and escutcheons.

D. Modified lavatory trap assembly: Designed complete with chrome plated tubing, compression fittings and escutcheons.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIO:'llS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

PLUMBI:'IIG SPECIALTIES SECT! ON 15430 - 6

E. Automatic metering type: Designed to operate on pressure drop in piping serving fixture. Device shall be completely serviceable and installed in accessible location. Automatic type trap primers shall not be used in lieu of electronic, flush valve or vacuum breaker type, lavatory or sink trap primer assemblies unless indicated in drawings and where electronic, flush valve or vacuum breaker type, or sink primer assemblies cannot be provided due to design conditions.

2.11 TRAP PRIMERS (ELECTRONIC)


1. PPP or approved equal

B. Electronic metering type: Designed to operate off of a timed device and solenoid valve. Device shall be completely serviceable and installed in accessible location.

C. ETP-l pre-assembled and prepiped with:y,;" bronze female NPT, WOO rated inlet ball valve; W' brass electronic SOlenoid valve and type "L" copper manifold with liz" brass compression fittings.

I. Provide unit with vacuum breaker, electronic controller fully assembled in a NEMA#I metal enclosure with cover for surface or recess mounting.

2. Provide with calibrated manifold (up to 30 outlet openings) with liz" compression fittings. 3. Electronic trap primer shall deliver a minimum 2 oz. water at 20 PSI per drain served; install

trap priming valve a minimum 12" above the floor for every 20 feet of run to p-trap. 4. Provide water supply to unit from reduced pressure type backflow preventer, provided

separately from trap primer.

2.12 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS


l. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn

B. ANSI AlI2.26.1; stainless steel construction; bellows type sized in accordance with PDI WH-201; precharged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 OF and maximum 150 psi working pressure

2.13 OIL-WATER SEPARATOR


1. J. R. Smith

B. ANSI A 112.14.6; steel construction with acid resistant coating inside and out; flow control fitting; No-hub adapter (J. R. Smith Fig. 2646Y); and H20 traffic rated cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A .. Provide specialties in accordance with manufi!cturer's instructions and as indicated on the drawings.

1339



B. Provide access doors where specialties are not exposed unless indicated to be provided under other Divisions. Access doors shall comply with Section 08311. Coordinate sized location with access requirements.

3.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Install approved potable water protection devices where indicated and on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.

B. Provide pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.

3.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

B. Encase exterior cleanouts in 18x 18x6 inch concrete flush with grade. Block shall have beveled edge.

C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

D. An easily accessible cleanout shall be provided at or near the floor in each vertical waste and soil stack, and at each urinal. Each house sewer shall be provided with a cleanout within 7 feet of where sewer leaves tlle building, installed in a "Y" branch fitting; additional cleanouts shall be installed where indicated on drawings and as required by code.

E. Cleanouts in buildings shall be not more than 100 feet apart in horizontal drainage lines.

F. Cleanouts shall be installed at each change of direction of the building sewer greater than 45 degree angle.

O. A cleanout fitting shall be installed at the end of each horizontal drainage line that changes direction to vertical.

3.4 TRAP PRIMERS

A. All traps in the waste system shall have trap primers.

B. Floor drains and drip drains, except drains where water is continuously wasted by item of equipment, shall have electronic trap primers. Trap primers for floor drains in public restrooms are not indicated on the drawings.

C. Locate trap primers in accessible location in mechanical rooms or where directed on the job. Where primer is located in finished area, conceal it in wall and provide an access panel.

D. Connect non-electronic trap primer to y, inch cold water line serving a frequently used fixture. Pipe connection between primer and drain shall be made with 3/8 inch ID rigid copper. Exposed primer tubing shall be chrome plated. Wherever possible, flush valve or trap assembly shall be used in lieu of mechanical type primer in public restrooms.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNIIT COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

3.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS


A. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and in accordance with the following schedule. Install water hammer arrestors at all quick closing valves and solenoid valves and at each plumbing fixture or battery of fixtures (except drinking fountains) in domestic water systems. Air chambers are not allowed.

Size Cross Reference (inches) Fixture Units PDI Standard

* 110 II A 1 12 to 32 B 1 331060 C 1 61 to 113 D 1 11410154 E 1 15510330 F ..... _------


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall-mounted lavatories (vitreous china)

B. Electric water coolers

C. Utility Sink

D. Emergency showers/eye·wash

E. Floor-mounted flush valve water closets

F. Floor·mounted service sinks

G. Showers

H. Stainless steel sinks

l. Urinals


A. Division 7

B. Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical" Requirements

C. Section 15010 Project Finalization

D. Section 15140 - Supports, Anchors, Curbs, Seals, and Flashings


F. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties

G. Section 15450 Plumbing Equipment

1.3 REFERENCES

A. General

PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440 - I

I. ASME AI12.6.l- Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use 2. ASME AI12.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings 3. ASME A112.l9.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures 4. ASME A 112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures 5. ASME A 112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Fonned Steel Plumbing Fixtures 6. ASME A 112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals 7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

B. Drinldng fountains and electric water coolers:

1339


PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440 - 2

1. ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers

C. Emergency eye-wash and showers:

1. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eye Wash and Shower Equipment

D. Showers:

1. ASSE 1016 Automatic Compensating Valves for Individual Showers

1.4 SUSTAINABLE BffiLDINGS



A. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.


A. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUffiEMENTS

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Acccpt fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.


A. General

1. Supply two sets of each different type of faucet washer, two flush valve service kits, and two of each type of faucet cartridge.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES (VITREOUS CHINA)

A. Lavatory


a. American Standard b. Crane

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECf NO. 2614.226

c. Kohler


2. ANSI AI 12.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory; 4" high back; drillings on 4 inch as scheduled on drawings; front overflow; soap depression; and rectangular basin with splash lip.

B. Faucet


a Moen

2. Chrome plated brass body with manually adjustable hot/cold single lever actuation where indicated and scheduled on drawings; adjustable limit stop; replaceable ceramic disc cartridge type; 0.5 gpm flow restriction (unless scheduled otherwise) with aerator; vandal resistant.

3. Chrome plated brass body with electronic AA battery sensor operated hand washing faucet) where indicated and scheduled on drawings (manual operation without sensor when scheduled); adjustable limit stop; replaceable ceramic disc cartridge; vandal resistant.

C. Supplies


a. Brass Craft b. Dearborn Brass c. Chicago

2. Chrome plated combination supply fitting with open grid strainer; chrome plated P-trap with extension.

D. Wall·Mounted Carrier


a J. R. Smith b. Zurn

2. ANSI A 112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs; lugs for floor and wall attachment; threaded studs for fixture hangers; concealed arm supports; bearing plate and studs

3. J. R. Smith Fig. 700 frame wall construction 4. J. R. Smith Fig. 720, 722, Or 727 for masonry wall application.

2.2 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS


1. Elkay

B. ARI 1010; combination electric water cooler with hydration station including stainless steel top; surface, semi-recessed, or handicapped mounted as indicated in the drawings on the schedules; vinyl on steel or stainless steel body as indicated in the drawings on the schedules; elevated anti·squirt bubbler with stream guard; automatic stream regulator; push button; mounting bracket; refrigerated

1339


PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440·4

with integral air cooled condenser and stainless steel grille, electronically controlled hydration station with filter system for high drinking water qUality.

2.3 EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYE/FACE WASH

A. Manufacturer (Refer to Section 15000):

1. Acorn Safety 2. Guardian 3. Haws 4. Chicago Faucets

B. ANSI Z358.1; free·standing pedestal mounted combination drench shower and eye/face wash; stainless steel eye/face wash bowl with ABS plastic eye/face wash spray heads; inline strainer and stay-open W' ball valve with push handle and a shower with plastic showerhead and I" stay-open ball valve and 29" stainless steel pull rod.

1. Water Supply: 1·114" NPT female threaded side or top inlet 2. Waste Outlet: 1-114" NPT female outlet

2.4 FLOOR·MOUNTED FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closet


a. American Standard b. Crane c. Kohler

2. ANSI A 112.19.2; floor-mounted; siphon jet; vitreous china closet bowl; elongated rim; Ilh inch top spud; china bolt caps

B. Sensor.Operated Flush Valve


a. Moen b. Zurn c. Sloan

2. ANSI A 112.18.1; concealed rough brass or exposed chrome plated as indicated on the draWings in the schedules; piston dual flush type with low voltage or battery operated solenoid operator as indicated on the drawings in the schedules; over-ride button in chrome plated plate; wheel handle stop and vacuum breaker; 1.1 Or 1.6 gallon dual flush volume.

C. Seat


a. Bemis b. Church c. Beneke

1339


d. Olsonite


2. Solid white plastic; open front; extended back; brass bolts; without cover, check hinge.

2.5 FLOOR-MOUNTED SERVICE SINKS

A. Sink


a. Stern Williams b. Fiat c. Florestone d. Acorn

2. Molded stone; floor mounted; with minimum 1 inch wide shoulders; stainless steel guard; stainless steel strainer.

B. Trim


a. Chicago b. American Standard c. Stern Williams d. Fiat e. Florestone

2. Exposed waH type supply; spout wall brace; vacuum breaker; hose end spout; strainer' eccentric adjustable inlets; integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges; 5 feet of V, inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose; hose clamp; mop hanger. Maximum 2.5 gpm.

2.6 SHOWERS

A. Shower Valve


a. Moen

2. ANSI A 112.18.1; concealed shower supply with pressure balanced mixing valves, integral service stops, bent shower ann with flow control and adjustable spray ball joint shower head with maximum 1.5 gpm flow, and escutcheon. Provide ADA mounting as required

2.7 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS

A. Sink


a. Elkay b. Just

1339

CAMPUS OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEYCOMMGNITYCOLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226


2. ANSI Al 12.19.3; 18 gauge Type 302 stainless steel; self-rimming and undercoated; ledge back drilled fur trim

B. Faucet


a. American Standard b. Moen

2. Chrome plated cast brass body and tubular brass swing spout with manually adjustable hollcold lever(s); replaceable ceramic disc type; 2.0 gpm flow restriction with swivel aerator. Single or dual lever handle, with or without retractable sprayerlhose assembly as scheduled on drawings.

C. Supplies


a. Brass Craft b. Dearborn Brass c. Chicago

2. Chrome plated P-trap with clean-out plug and ann with escutcheon.

2.8 URINALS

A. Urinal


a. American Standard b. Crane c. Kohler

2. ANSI AIl2.19.2; vitreous china; wall hung; siphon jet; shields; integral trap; removable stainless steel strainer; % inch top spud

B. Sensor-Operated Flush Valve


a. Moen b. Zurn c. Sloan

2. ANSI AIl2.18.1; concealed rough brass or exposed chrome plated as indicated on the drawings in the schedules; piston type with low voltage or battery operated solenoid operator as indicated on the drawings in the schedules; infrared sensor and over-ride button in chrome plated plate; wheel handle stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 0.125 gallon per flush volume.

C. Wall-Mounted Carrier

1339



a. J.R_ Smith b. Zurn

2. J.R. Smith Fig. 637

2.9 UTILITY SINK

A. Utility Sink


a. Mustee & Sons

PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-7

2. ANSI Z 124.6; one piece molded tub constructed of crushed stone and polyester resin with built-in scrub board, integrally molded drain assembly, stopper, and floor and wall mounting hardware with trim package as scheduled on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture schedule for particular fixtures.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide as detailed and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Instal1 each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

C. Provide chrome plated rigid Or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons.

D. No slip joints will be allowed on supplies.

E. Install components level and plumb.

F. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. AU wall hung lavatories shall have concealed arm carriers.

G. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX Y AKThIA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2&14·226


H. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.

I. Refer to Architectural drawings for exact locations and mounting heights.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.6 CLEAJI.'lNG (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Oean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements - Protecting installed work

B. Do not permit uSe of fixtures.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electric Water Heaters

B. Diaphragm-Iype compression tanks

C. In-line circulator pumps



B. Section ISO 10 Project Finalization

C. Section 15135 - Gauges and Meters

D. Section 15145 Wind and Seismic Load Restraints

E. Section IS I 90 - Mechanical Identification

F. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

G. Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation

H. Section 1541O-PlumbingPiping

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design

B. ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels

C. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

E. UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters

F. UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters


PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15450 - I



A. Product Data:

I. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping.

2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.

1339


PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15450 - 2

3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.

4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate equipment dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data. 2. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,

tappings, and drains.

1.6 OPERATION AlIi'D MAINTENANCE DATA (REFER TO SECTION (5010)

A. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.

1.7 QUAlJTY ASSURANCE

A. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: American Gas Association (AGA); National Sanitation Foundation (NSF); American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME); National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI); National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA); Underwriters Laboratories (UL); ASHRAE 90-A energy efficiency standards.

B. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 % of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUlREMElIilS

A. Conform to AGA, NSF, UL 174, UL 1453 requirements for water heaters.

B. Conform to ASME Section 8D for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers.

C. Conform to ASME Section 8D for tanks.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDliNG (REFER TO SECTION 150(0)

A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS


1. RheemlRuud 2. A.O. Smith 3. Bradford White

1339


B. Water heater shall be UL listed and ASHRAE 90.1 compliant.

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15450 - 3

C. Water heater shaH meet minimum energy factor performance per 2012 NREC Table C404.2 for heaters less than 12 kw.

O. Type: Factory assembled and simultaneously wired, electric, vertical storage.

E. Glass lined, welded steel, thermally insulated with 2-112 inches rigid polyurethane foam in a corrosion resistant steel jacket; baked-on porcelain enamel finish. Maximum working pressure 150 psig. Provide 3 year warranty on tank.

F. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 deg. F to 140 deg. F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat.

G. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.

H. Refer to schedule on drawings for model numbers, size, capacities, and accessories.

2.2 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS


1. Amtrol 2. Taco

B. Construction: Welded steel; tested and stamped in accordance with Section 80 of ASME Code; supplied with National Board Form U-1; rated for working pressure of 125 psig; with heavy duty butyl rubber diaphragm or bladder; and steel legs or saddles. Diaphragm tank shall be full acceptance type allowing for inspection.

C. Accessories: Pressure gauge and air-charging fitting; tank drain; precharge to 12 psig unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

O. Refer to schedule on drawings for model numbers, size, etc.

2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS


1. B&G 2. Taco 3. Paco 4. Armstrong

B. Construction: Bronze casing; 125 psig working pressure; replaceable impeller assembly; no mechanical seals.

C. Refer to schedule on drawings for model numbers, size, capacities, accessories.

O. Impeller: Bronze.

E. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.

1339


F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLA nON - GENERAL

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15450·4

A. Heater shall be installed and placed in operation by factory approved mechanic and per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Pipe relief valve discharge to floor drain or other safe location as indicated.

C. Provide water heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA and UL requirements as applicable.

D. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting and electrical work to achieve operating system.

E. Provide isolation valves and unions at all tanks, heaters, softeners, pumps, booster system.

F. Pipe relief valve discharge to floor drain or other safe location as indicated.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start water heaters under provisions of Section 150 I O.

B. Instruct operating personnel in operation and maintenance of units.

C. Startup and testing shall be accomplished by a factory trained technician. Service technician performing startup shall provide a report of startup and test results for 0 & M Manual (Refer to Section 15010).


1339


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION lNCLUDES

A. Filter-dryer

B. Moisture and liquid indicators

C. Refrigerant

D. Refrigerant Piping

E. Check valve

F. Manual Refrigerant ShUl-off valve

G. Access doors

H. Piping supports and inserts


A. Division 8 - Access Doors

B. Section 09910 - Painting

C. Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements

REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 15535" J

D. Section 15140 - Supports, Anchors, Curbs, Seals, and Flashings

E. Section 15245 -Vibration Isolation

F. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation

1.3 REFERENCES

A. General

1. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 2. AS1M B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service 3. A WS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal 4. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves

B. Piping

1. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping

1.4 SUSTAlNABLE BUILDINGS


1339


REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 15535 - 2


A. Shop Drawings: Submit schematic layout of system, including pipe sizes, risers, valves, specialty devices, equipment and critical dimensions. Layout shall be reviewed and approved by the supplier of the respective equipment (air cooled condensing units and air handling units).

B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, Including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

C. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing.

D. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and isolation for servicing.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts lists.


A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the purpose indicated.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

C. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation.

D. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All specialty devices shall be suitable for system operating pressures and temperatures.

2.2 FILTER DRYER

A. Manufacturers (Refur to Section 15000):

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT SO. 2014-226

1. Alco 2. Asco 3. Sporlan 4. Virginia


B. Filter drier shall be replaceable core type with nonferrous casing and Schraeder type valve_

C. Size shall be full line size.

2.3 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS


1. Alco 2. Asco 3. Mueller 4. Sporlan

B. Combination moisture and liquid indicator with protection cap.

C. Sight glass shall be full line size.

D. Sight glass connections shall be solid copper Or brass, no copper- coated steel sight glasses allowed.

2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed

1. Fittings: ASME B 16.22 wrought copper, long radius elbows 2. Joints: Braze, AWS AS.& BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy melting range 1,190 to 1,4&0

degrees F 3. Traps: Standard one piece

2.5 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant: ASHRAE 34. Type as specified for each type of equipment

2.6 CHECK VALVE


'1. Superior 2. Henry

B. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cup with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder and teflon seat disc

2.7 MANUAL REFRIGERANT SHUT-OFF VALVE


1. ConBraCo (Apollo) 2. Henry

\339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO.1014·lUi

3. Mueller 4. Superior 5. Virginia


B. Ball valves designed for refrigeration service and full line size.

C. Valves shall have cap seals.

D. Valves with hand wheels are not acceptable.

E. Provide service valve on each liquid and suction line at compressor.

F. Ifservice valves come as integral part of condensing unit, additional service valves shall not be required.

2.8 ACCESS DOORS


2.9 PIPING SUPPORTS AND INSERTS


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide refrigeration piping and specialty devices required for a complete operating systems as required by the condensing unit and air handling unit manufacturer.

B. Where isolation valves, driers, etc. are an integral piece of the equipment, additional shall not be required.

C. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

E. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one (I) % in direction of oil return.

G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

l339



H. Pipe Hangers and Supports Inserts: Provide in accordance with Section 15140.

l. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fIttings.

J. Provide access doors for access to concealed valves and fittings. Access doors shall be in accordance with Section 08311.

K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09910.

L. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 15260.

M. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.

N. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft. Flex connectors specified in section 15245.

O. Anchor pipe near each flexible connector.

P. Refrigerant piping below grade shall be installed in PVC conduit with long sweep bends. See drawings for installation details.

Q. Slope suction lines down toward compressor 1 inch per 10 feet. Locate traps at vertical rises against flow in suction lines.

R. Refrigeration system connections shall be copper to copper type properly cleaned and brazed. Use flux only where necessary.

I. No soft solder connections will be allowed in system. If used, refrigerant piping will be rejected and will be required to be re-piped with new piping and brazed joints.

S. Braze valve, sight glass, and flexible connections.

T. Circulate dry nitrogen through tubes being brazed to eliminate formation of copper oxide during brazing operation.

U. Anchor pipe near each flexible connector.

V. Fully charge completed systems with refrigerant after testing.

W. Power and control wiring to devices furnished under this section shall be provided under this section in accordance with Division 16 requirements.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Make evacuation and leak tests in presence of Architect's Engineer after completing refrigeration piping systems. A positive pressure test will not suffice for the procedure outlined below.

1339

I. Draw vacuum on each entire system with vacuum pump to 200 microns using a vacuum gauge calibrated in microns. Do not use cooling compressor to evacuate system nor operate it while system is under high vacuum.

2. Break vacuum with Freon to be used and re-establish vacuum test. Vacuum shall hold for twenty-four (24) hours at 200 microns without compressor running.


REFRIGERAI'>T PIPING AND SPEClALTIES SECTION 15535 - Ci

3. Conduct tests at 70 OF ambient temperature or above. 4. Do not run systems until above tests have been made and systems started up as specified.

Infonn Owner's Representative of status of systems at time of final inspection and schedule start-up testing if prevented by outdoor conditions before this time.

S. After testing, fully charge system with refrigerant and conduct test with Halide Leak Detector.


1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECI' NO. 2QI4-226

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufactured vents for gas fired equipment



1.3 REFERENCES

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS SECTION 15575-1

A. ASTM A 167 • Stainless and Heat· Resisting Chromium· Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot·Dip Process, General Requirements

C. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot·Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality

D. ASTM A569- Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.15 % Maximum) Hot-Rolled Commercial Quality

E. NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) - The National Fuel Gas Code

F. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code

G. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards· Metal and Flexible

H. UL 378 - Standard for Draft Equipment

I. UL 441 - Standard for Gas Vents

J. UL 641 • Standard for Low Temperature Venting Systems

K. UL 959 (ANSI ZI81.1)· Medium Heat Appliance Factory Built Chimneys

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Breeching: Vent Connector

B. Chimney: Primarily vertical shaft enclosing at least one vent for conducting flue gases outdoors

C. Smoke Pipe: Round, single wall vent connector

D. Vent: That portion ofa venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a vent connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used

E. Vent Connector: That of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from the flue collar of an appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Factory built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances shall comply with NFPA 211 and be UL listed and labeled.

1339



A. Submit under Section 15000.

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS SECTION 15575 • 2

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, dimensions, weights, support and layout ofbreechings. Submit layout drawings indicating plan view and elevations.

C. Product Data: Provide data indicating factory built chimneys, including dimensional details of components and flue caps, dimensions and weights, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.


A. Conform to applicable code NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) for installation of natural gns burning appliances and equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS VENTS

A. Vent pipe shall be double wall approved by UL Standard 1738 for a category III appliance.

l. Metalbestos 2. Amerivent 3. Ampco 4. Metal Fab

B. Combustion air inlet pipe shall be galvanized steel, single wall.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.11NSTALLATION

A. Provide in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated.

B. Install in accordance with NFPA 211,37, NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1.) NFPA 31 and UL listing.

C. Install chimneys with minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, with internal surfaces smooth.

D. Support chimneys from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors to hold to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical breechings, chimneys, and stacks at 12 feet spacing, to adjacent structural sumces, or at floor penetrations. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for equivalent duct support configuration and size.

E. Install concrete inserts for support of breechings, chimneys, and stacks in coordination with formwork.

F. For double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories as required for complete installation and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1339


BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS SECTION 15575 - 3

G. Joint cement or sealant for double wall chimneys shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and UL listing for the application.

H. Level and plumb chimney and stacks.

I. Clean breechings, chimneys, and stacks during installation, removing dust and debris.

J. At appliances, provide slip joints permitting removal of appliances without removal or dismantling of breechings, breeching insulation, chimneys, or stacks.

K. Make provisions for condensate drainage from chimneys and exhaust systems. Pipe drain from tees to nearest floor drain.

L. Provide all fittings, thimbles, flashing, etc., for a complete installation and terminate in accordance with code and manufacturer requirements with an approved vent cap.

M. Provide neoprene wrap between supports and double wall chimneys.

N. Provide chimneys and vents in accordance with the schedule.

3 2 SCHEDULES Equipment Vent Combustion Air Gas-Fired Unit Heater Double Wall Vent Pipe U.L. 17381 Single Wall Galvanized Steel

Category III Gas-Fire Duct Double Wall Vent Pipe U.L. 17381 Single Wall Galvanized Steel Furnace Category III


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Rooftop Make-up Air Units

B. Gas-Fired Duct Furnaces

C. Gas-Fired Unit Heaters

D. Packaged Rooftop Units

E. Roof Curbs


A. Section 15000 - General Mechanical Requirements.

B. Section 15010 - Project Finalization.

C. Section 15140 - Supports, Anchors, Curbs, Seals and Flashings

D. Section 15145 - Seismic Restraints

E. Section 15170 - Motors.

F. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation.

G. Section 15885 - Air Cleaning Devices.

H. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories

INDIRECf FIRED AIR UNITS SECfION 15624 - 1

l. Section 15970 - Energy Management and Direct Digital Control System

J. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI! AFBMA9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. ABMA STD II - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for RoHer Bearings.

C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

D. AMCA 300 - Methods of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.

E. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

F. ARI 410 - Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

H. UI. 1995 - Standard for Safety - Heating and Cooling Equipment.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKL'fA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

INDIRECT FIRED AIR UNITS SECTION 15624 • 2

l. ASHRAE 52.2: Procedures for Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used for Removing Particulate Matter

J. NFPA 90A: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

K. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

L. UL 900: Test Performance of Air Filter Units





B. Product Data:

I. Indicate dimensions, weights, tim performance, coil capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate construction details, entire assembly and required clearances.

2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames. 3. Test Reports:

a. Furnish fan performance curves depicting the operating point described on schedule for each individual fan. Curves shall indicate BHP, RPM, TSP, etc.

4. Electrical Requirements: Motor sizes and electrical characteristics. 5. Wiring diagrams indicating fuctory wiring and field points of connection and field wiring.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 150 I 0 • Project Finalization: . Operation and Maintenance Manual.

B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.

C. Include customized Parts list with HRU tag number, serial number, OEMs' part number/description for motor, coil, filters, filter gauges, bearings, drives, sheaves, fan shaft, belts and other commodity components.


A. System shall deliver the specified volume of air at the scheduled static pressure.

B. Unit shall be constructed to provide smooth interior surfaces.

C. Unit shall carry the label of a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) or a Standards Council of Canada (SCC) approved lab (Testing Organization and CertifYing Body).

D. Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.

E. Cabinet and exterior components shall be tested and certified as being weatherproof

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECf NO. 2014-226

1_8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 15000 - Product delivery, storage and handling.

INDIRECT FIRED AIR UNITS SECTION 15624 - 3

B. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.

C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

D. Do not allow unit internal insulation to become wet.


A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in placc, bearings lubricated, and fun has been test run under observation.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 150 I 0 - Project Finalization:

B. Supply one set for each unit size: fan belts.

C. Supply one set of filters in addition to the set furniShed at the time of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP MAKU-UP AIR UNIT

A. Manufacturers:

I. Reznor RDH 2. Approved equal.

B. General

I. Packaged, outdoor heating and makeup air, power vented units with direct spark ignition and 24V controls. The units shall be the RDH series, minimum 81 % efficiency, designed for slab or roof curb mounting. The gas furnace is to be arranged for ducted flue gas exhaust.

2. The packaged heating and makeup air system shall be design-certified and labeled to ANSI Z83.8 and CSA 2.6 Standards. The energy usage shall be designed to meet ASHRAE Standard 90. I.

3. Units shall be certified to meet the electrical requirements of the National Electrical Code.

C. Air Distribution & Dampers

1. Unit to be manufactured with downturn plenum Supply Air cabinet with bottom discharge and no discharge dampers.

2. Factory-installed Mixing Box shall be supplied with 100% Outside Air Opening in back. Outside air intake shall have weather hood and rain baffles.

1339



3. Manufacturer shall provide, fuctory-installed, motors, dampers, linkage and actuators for motorized Modulating Outside Air Dampers with Remote damper potentiometer (installed in field by Section 15970). On shutdown, the outside air damper shall close.

4. Manufacturer shall provide a factory-installed mixing box module. Said module shall be installed upstream of the blower cabinet and allow for a variety of outside air confIgurations with dampers.

D. Cabinet Construction

I. Cabinet shall have through-the-base utility knockouts. Control, burner, and blower service compartment doors shall be hinged. Blower door hardware shall be heavy duty stainless. Control and burner door hardware shall have heavy duty external hardware.

2. Unit cabinet to be supplied with double wall steel construction with factory installed I 112 Lb. density insulation. R value of said insulation shall be 3.8 or greater. Insulation with foil backing is not acceptahle.

3. The packaged system shaH have a pre-coat white paint finish. Finish shall be a minimum 80 gloss on 090 galvanized steel.

4. All painted metal shall pass 1,000 hour salt spray test per ASTM B-117. 5. Unit shall be designed with heavy 16 gauge prepainted steel rail perimeter hase. Said base

shall feature provisions for corner lifting, with lifting strap holes to facilitate handling and installation.

E. Combustion Air and Venting

1. The unit shall have a factory-installed power venter device with a centrifug'dl wheel and direct drive motor to draw combustion air through an inlet in the cabinet.

F. Electrical Specifications & Control Systems

1. All units shall be equipped with 24-volt control transformer; protective air proving switch; resiliently isolated venter motor; and a high temperature limit control. Operation shall be controlled through an integrated circuit board. The circuit board shall monitor heater operation and have LED diagnostic indicator lights to identifY abnormalities in control functions.

2. Unit Shall be supplied \vith a Motor starter, IEC open, for single-speed motors.

G. Filtering

1. Blower cabinet shall have Filter Section with an integral filter rack and 4" Pleated Filters.

H. Fuel & Burner Type

1. Unit to be supplied for operation with natural gas as fuel source. 2. Units to be supplied from factory adjusted for installation at altitudes from elevations 2001-

3000 Feet. 3. Burner shall be of a single body design with Stalnless Steel face insert. 4. The units shall incorporate a single, one piece burner assembly with a single orifice per

staging. 5. All units shall have a single venturi tube and orifice supplying fuel to a one piece burner

housing per staging.

1339

6. Each heat exchanger cell shall use balanced draft induction to maintain optimum flame control.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STA. TE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

INDIRECT FIRED AIR UNITS SECTION 15624 - S

1. Heat Exchanger

1. Heat exchanger shall be manufactured from die-formed halves of 409 (E-3) Stainless Steel. 2. All heat exchanger cells shall be designed with an aerodynamic cross section to provide

maximum airflow.

J. Supply Blower

1. Manufacturer to provide said unit with factory-installed Adjustable V-Belt Drive Blower. 2. The blower section shall include an adjustable belt-driven vibration isolated centrifugal

blower and vibration isolated motor. 3. To be available with rubber vibration isolation limiting motor and blower vibration

transmission.

K. Miscellaneous

I. Furnish with non-fused disconnect switch 2. Furnish with pre-fabricated insulated roof curb.

a. Seismic rated. Curbs shall be provided in this section in accordance with the requirements of Section 15145.

b. Height coordinated with roof insulation thickness to achieve a minimum ofl4" above "finished" roof surface.

c. Curb shall be sloped where required by roof slope to aUow for level equipment installation.

L. Controls

1. Units shall be equipped with the following to allow for control by the building automation system (Section 15970). See control drawings for interface requirements.

a. Provide contacts to allow fan startistop by the BAS. The BAS shall energize the constant speed fan on demand for ventilation or heat.

b. Provide outside air (2-position) dampers with linkage and 24V 2-position Belimo actuators. The BAS will modulate dampers to open on fan operation/close when unit is off.

c. Provide gas heaters with controls to accept a O-IOV or4-24V input from the BAS for 8:1 turndown. The BAS will enable heat and modulate heat to meet space temperature requirements.

d. All space sensor controls are provided by the BAS contractor. e. The units shall be provided with all safeties (factory installed) as previously

specified.

2.2 ROOFTOP MAKE-UP AIR UNIT

A. Manufacturers

I. Reznor RHH 2. Approved equal

B. General

1339


INDIRECT FIRED AIR ljNITS SECTION 15624 - 6

I. Packaged, Outdoor heating units. The units shall be minimum 91 % efficiency, with gas furnace, designed for mounting on a curb. The unit shall be specifically design for make-up air and space control applications, meeting all the requirements found in AHSRAE standard 90.1 and 62.2. The base unit shall consist of blower and gas heat section. The unit shall be modular such that mixing box sections can be added to the unit configuration.

2. The packaged heating system shall be design-certified and labeled to ANSI Z83.8 and CSA 2.6 Standards. The energy usage shall be designed to meet ASHRAE Standard 90. J.

3. Unit shall be certified to meet the electrical requirements ofthe National Electrical Code.

C. Cabinet Construction

1. Unit cabinet to be supplied with double wall steel construction with factory installed J 1/2 Lb. density insulation. R value of said insulation shall be 3.8 or greater. Insulation with foil backing is not acceptable.

2. The packaged system shall have a pre-coat white paint finish. Finish shall be a minimum 80 gloss on 030 galvanized steel. Cabinet shall be arranged for roof mounting with curb. Control, burner, and blower service compartment doors shall be hinged. Blower door hardware shall be heavy duty stainless. Control and burner door hardware shall have heavy duty external hardware.

D. Heat Exchanger

I. Super corrosion resistant stainless steel heat exchanger. 2. The gas furnace shall have a heat exchanger and single burner combustion system. The

Heating system shall provide a minimum of 91 % thermal efficiency. The combustion system primary heat exchanger shall be of high corrosion resistance steel. The secondary heat exchanger shall be of aluminum alloy. The furnace shall be equipped with all required safety elements including flue high temperature switch, condensate drain, and heat exchanger high temperature shutdown. Furnace operation shall be controlled through an integrated circuit board. The circuit board shall monitor heater operation and have LED diagnostic indicator lights to identify abnormalities in control functions. The circuit board shall monitor flame failure, failed ignition, airflow and low gas pressure.

E. Miscellaneous Features

I. Prefabricated insulated roof curb.

a. Seismic rated. Curbs shall be provided in this section in accordance with the requirements of Section 15145.

b. Height coordinated with roof insulation thickness to achieve a minimum of 14" above "finished" roof surface.

c. Curb shall be sloped where required by roof slope to allow for level equipment installation.

2. Furnish with non-fused disconnect switch. 3. 24V controls /24V control transformer. 4. Direct spark ignition.

F. Filtering

1. Blower cabinet shall have Filter Section with an integral ftIter rack and 4" Pleated Filters.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECfNO. 2014.226

G. Fuel & Burner Type


I. Unit to be supplied for operation with natural gas as fuel source. 2. Units to be supplied from factory adjusted for installation at altitudes from elevations 2001-

3000 Feet.

H. Electrical Specifications & Control Systems

I. Unit Shall be supplied with a Motor starter, lEC open, for single-speed motors.

1. Air Intake Options

1. Unit to be furnished with rectory supplied 100% outside air screened inlet hood with moisture eliminator louvers.

J. Supply Blower

1. Manufacturer to provide said unit with rectory-installed Adjustable V-Belt Drive Blower. 2. To be available with rubber vibration isolation limiting motor and blower vibration

transmission. 3. The base unit blower shall include an adjustable belt-driven centrifugal fan. Fan shal! have air

proving switch inter-locked with gas controls to prevent gas heat operation when the fan is not operational.

K. Air Distribution & Dampers

1. Unit to be manufactured with downturn plenum Supply Air cabinet with bottom discharge and no discharge dampers.

2. Factory-installed Mixing Box shall be supplied with flanged 100% Return Air Opening in Bottom and 100% Outside Air Opening in back.

3. Manufacturer shall provide, factory-installed, motors, dampers, linkage and actuators for motorized Modulating Outside Air and Return Air Dampers with Remote damper potentiometer (installed in field by Section 15970). Said configuration shaH provide for mixture of outside and return air as controlled by Section 15970. On shutdown, the outside air damper shall close.

4. Manufacturer shall provide a factory-installed mixing box module. Said module shall be installed upstream of the blower cabinet and allow for a variety of outside air and return air configurations.

L. Controls

1339

1. Units shall be equipped with the following to allow for control by the building automation system (Section 15970). See control drawings for interface requirements.

a. Provide contacts to allow fan start/stop by the BAS. The BAS shall energize the constant speed fan on demand for ventilation or heat.

b. Provide outside air and return air dampers with linkage and 24V modulating Belimo actuators. The BAS will modulate dampers to meet space ventilation requirements.

c. Provide gas heaters with controls to accept a O-IOV or 4-24V input from the BAS for 8:1 turndown. The BAS will enable heat and modulate heat to meet space temperature requirements.

d. All space sensor controls are provided by the BAS contractor.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-:126


e. The units shall be provided with all safeties (factory installed) as previously specified.

2.3 GAS-FIRED DUCT FURNACE

A. Manufacturers

1. ReznorSC 2. Approved equal

B. General

1. 80% thermal-efficient, separated combustion, gas-fired duct furnaces. !include all limit and safety controls, including a combustion air pressure differential switch to verify proper vent flow before allowing operation of the gas valve. All gas-fired unit heaters must bear a C.S.A. label.

2. Spark ignition, fan control, 24 volt control transformer.

C. Approvals & Certifications

1. Units shall be CSA Design Certified and labeled in the U.S. under ANSI Z83.9 or approved equal nationally recognized independent testing agency.

2. Unit shall meet ASHRAE 90.1 Standards. 3. Unit shall be certified to meet the electrical requirements of the National Electrical Code

D. Fuel & Burner Type

1. Unit to be supplied with steel die-fonned "ribbon" style atmospheric burners to be constructed with 409 E-3 stainless steel ribbon inserts. Burners should be designed with a diefonned flared inlet port,

E. Heat Exchanger

1. E-3 (409) stainless steel heat exchanger.Cells shall be of two-piece, seam welded construction joined by weld to top and bottom panels.

F. Combustion Air and Venting

1. The units shall be designed as Separated Combustion Units. The unit shall have a factoryinstalled power venter device to draw outdoor combustion air via a combustion air inlet pipe through an inlet collar on the cabinet.

2. The vent terminaVcombustion air inlet assembly shall be arranged to allow a single wall Or roof penetration.

G. Miscellaneous

l. Furnish unit with non-fused disconnect switch. 2. Electronic modulation gas control for control by the Building Automation System.

Coordinate with 15970. All safeties provided with unit. 3. Vertical combustion air inletlvent terminal assembly:

a. Exhaust Vent Terminal b. Combustion Air Inlet

1339


c. Concentric Adapter Box

2.4 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATER

A. Manufacturers

l. Remor UDAS 2. Approved equal.

B. General


I. Provide (82%, 83%) high-efficiency, power vented, gas-fired unit heaters 2. All units shall be design certified and labeled by the Canadian Standards Association to ANSI

ZS3.Sb and CSA 2.6b for commercial/industrial installation. 3. Unit shall meet ASHRAE 90.1 requirements. 4. Unit shall be certified to meet the electrical requirements of the National Electrical Code

C. Cabinet Construction

l. The cabinet shall be low profile with a pre-coat or powdercoat white paint finish. Finish shall be a minimum SO gloss on G30 galvanized steel.

2. The unit shall be designed for ceiling suspension both 2-point and 4- point locations with no additional adapter kits.

3. The cabinet shall be equipped with horizontal louvers. Louvers shall be spring held and adjustable for directing airflow.

4. The cabinet shall be equipped with a futl safety fan guard. The motor and fan assembly shall be resiliently mounted to the cabinet to reduce vibration and noise.

5. The unit shall be designed with a f\lll opening service access panel complete with screw closure attachment and lifting handle for removal. All components in the gas train, all standard electrical controls, and the power venter shall be within the service compartment.

6. Unit to be supplied with soft conforming gasket material around access door to prevent cabinet leakage.

7. All seams and openings in cabinet b\lrner & controls area to be sealed to minimize space air infiltration.

S. Unit to be supplied with Combustion air inlet roll crimped to the unit for soUd gap-free joint.

D. Combustion Air and Venting

I. The units shall be designed as Separated Combustion Units. The \lnit shall have a factolYinstalled power venter device to draw outdoor combustion air via a combustion air inlet pipe through an inlet collar on the cabinet.

2. The combustion air/venting system shall include a vibration isolated power venter motor and wheel assembly and a comb\lstion air pressure switch.

E. Electrical Specifications & Control Systems

l. Ignition to be controlled with direct spark ignition with electronic flame supervision with 100% lockout integrally controlled via a printed circuit control board.

2. Said unit control board shall incorporate diagnostic lights, DIP switches for fan overrun settings, and a relay for fan only operation.

3. All units shall be equipped with a safety limit switch.

1339


INDIRECT FIRED AIR UNITS SECTION 15624 -10

4. All controls shall be enclosed in the unit housing to protect them from accidental damage that could be caused by factors in the building that would adversely affect external mounted controls.

5. Supply voltage connections are made at the circuit board. 6. 24-volt control connections shall be made on an externally mounted terminal strip with

connections. 7. All internal wiring, both line and control voltages, shall be terminated by insulated terminal

connectors to minimize shock hazard during service. S. Access Door shall feature an integral door open interlock switch to de-energize unit while

open for service. 9. Manufacturer to include supply voltage junction enclosure inside unit for improved

separation of combustion air from room space air and contaminants. 10. 24 Volt transformer.

F. Fuel & Burner Type

1. Burner shall be of a single body design with Stainless Steel mce insert. The units shall incorporate a single, one piece burner assembly with a single orifice per staging. The burner shall have a continuous wound close pressed stainless steel ribbon separating the flame from the burner interior. All units shall have a single venturi tube and orifice supplying fuel to a one piece burner housing per staging. Each heat exchanger cell shall use balanced draft induction to maintain optimum flame control.

G. Heat Exchanger

I. The heater shall be equipped with a multi cell, 4 pass serpentine style steel heat exchanger. Heat exchanger tubes shall be press fabricated. 409 stainless steel. All heat exchanger cells shall be designed with an aerodynamic cross section to provide maximum airflow.

H. Miscellaneous

\. Furnish with non-fused disconnect switch. 2. Vertical Combustion AirlVent Kit inclUding Concentric Adapter:

a. Terminal Assembly b. Combustion Air Inlet Assembly c. Concentric Adapter Box

3. Horizontal Combustion AirlV ent Kit including Concentric Adapter:

a. Exhaust Grille b. Inlet guard c. Concentric adapter box

I. Controls for Gas Unit Heaters

1339

I. Units shall be equipped with the following to allow for control by the building automation system (Section 15970). See control drawings for interface requirements.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMJl.1UNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO, 2014-226


2. Provide contacts to allow cycle fan and heat by the building automation system. Space sensors for controls will be provided by 15970.

3. The units shall be provided with all safeties (factory installed) as previously specified,

2.5 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT

A. Unit shall comply with ANZ1 Z21.47fUL 1995 and National Electrical Code.

B. Unit shall meet ASHRAE 90.1 requirements.

C. Approved Manufucturers

1. Trane 2. Approve equal.

D. General

1. Units shall be a packaged, gas-fired, DX cooling rooftop unit.

E. Unit Casing

1. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an alr-dry paint coating with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 18 gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.

2. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B1l7.

3. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be doublehemmed and gasket-sealed.

4. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section.

5. Units base pan shall have a raised I 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and return openings for water integrity.

6. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation with foil face on all exterior panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. All edges must be captured so that there is no insulation exposed in the air stream.

7. Provide openings either on side of unit or through the base for power, control, condensate, and gas connections.

F. Air Filters

I. Air Filters: Factory installed filter rack shall mount integral within the unit and shall be accessible through access panels. Filter rack shall accommodate 2" filters.

G. Fan and Motors

1. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan.

2. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings.

3. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically balanced supply fans.

1339



4. Provide units 6 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves. 5. Outdoor and Indoor Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal

overload protection. . 6. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the

vertical discharge position. 7. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key·way, and

protectively coated with lubricating oil.

H. Gas Fired Heating Section

I. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit, UL or CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. 1breaded connection with plug or cap provided.

2. Induced draft combustion type with direct spark ignition system, redundant main gas valve, and 2-staged heat.

3. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Provide flame rollout switches.

4. Induced draft blower shall have combustion air proving switches and built-in thermal overload protection on fan motor.

S. Heat Exchanger: Provide tubular section type constructed from 18-gauge aluminized steel. 6. Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of

excessive temporatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss ofindoor airflow.

I. Evaporator Coil

I. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil. 2. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure

tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig. 3. Provide a removable, reversible, cleanable double sloped drain pan for base of evaporator coil

constructed of PVC.

J. Condenser Section

I, Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing.

K. Refrigeration System

I. Provide each unit with refrigerant cireuit(s) factory·supplied complctely piped with liquid line filter·drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.

2. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, discharge muffler, flow control check valve, and electronic adaptive demand defrost control on all units.

L. Outdoor Air Section

1. Provide 100% return air. 2. Provide economizer with dry bulb control.

M. Operating Controls

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE Sf ATE PROJECT NO.lOI4-226


1. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor slugging by interrupting compressor operation.

2. Provide an anti-cycle timing and minimum onloffbetween stages timing in the microprocessor.

3. Unit shall be provided with Electro-Mechanical Controls to allow for direct control by the building automation system (Section 15970) without use of interface cards. See control drawings for interface requirements. The RTU shall be shipped with the following factory installed features:

a. ContactIRelay to allow the BAS (Section 15970) to engaging and staging heating. b. Contaet/Relay to allow the BAS (Section 15970) to engage and stage cooling. c. Supply fan contactlRelay for constant speed on/off control. d. Motorized, modulating, low leak, 24V motorized return air and outside air dampers

with factory installed linkages. e. 0-10V or 4-24V relay for the control contractor to modulate return air and outside air

dampers for economizer cooling. f. Barometric damper for economizer relief sized for 100% air side economizer. g. Factory installed safeties for refrigeration and heating.

N. Roof Curb

1. Seismic rated. Curlis shall be provided in this section in accordance with the requirements of Section 15145.

O. Miscellaneous

1. Furnish with non-fused disconnect switch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1INSTALLATION

A. Provide units as indicated on the drawings.

B. Install in accordance with the manufacturer requirements.

C. Provide vibration isolation in accordance with Section 15245.

D. Make all duct and piping connections to units as indieated on the drawings. Piping connections to coils shall be made with unions or flanges.

E. Pipe condensate drain outlet size to nearest floor drain with trap in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. At a minimum, drains shall be provided at heat exchanger and cooling coil.

F. Install piping and ductwork to allow proper access to unit access doors and to facilitate coil removal.

G. Provide required sheaves to achieve final air balance at no additional cost. This applies to fixed as well as adjustable sheaves.

H. Coordinate placement of curbs and duct openings with the general contractor and coordinate with roof framing in the project planning phase.

1339


I. Roof Curbs

I. Fasten unit on curb and set level.


2. Hard connect ductwork to the unit connections (do not use curb as a plenum). 3. Provide gasket between unit and curb. 4. Counterflashing from unit to curb under Division 15. 5. Roofing and roof flashing not in Division 15.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Prepare and start systems.

B. Supply service of factory trained representative for a period of one (1) day to supervise testing" startup, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner.

C. Submit start-up reports to the Owner's representative and include copy in the Operations and maintenance Manual.


1339

CAMPUS OPERA nONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014.226

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Outdoor Condensing Units (ACU-l)

B. Indoor Fan Coil Unit (CU- I)



B. Section 15005 - Sustainable Building Construction

C. Section 150 I 0 - Project Finalization

D. Section 15170-Molors

E. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

F. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties

G. Section 15885 - Air Cleaning Devices

DUCfLESS SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECfION 15786 - I

H. Section 15970 - Energy Management and Control Systems

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment

B. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment

C. ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Condensing Units

D. ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing Units

E. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

G. NEMA MGI - Motors and Generators

H. UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Non-Electrical

I. UL 303 - Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing, and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment



1.S SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Submit in accordance with Section 15000.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COM~UNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014.226

DUCTLESS SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 15786 - 2

B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weight, specialties and accessories, electrical nameplate data, wiring diagrams. Performance ratings shall be matched with indoor equipment to ensure capacities are complementary.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT (REFER TO SECTION 1S010)

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panels, pipe connections, etc.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's warranty for heat pump, microprocessor controller and all other parts.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with a minimum five (5) years of experience.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTIONS

A. Section 15000 - Product delivery, storage, and handling

B. Accept products on-site in factory-fabricated protective containers. Inspect for damage.

C. Comply with manufacturers installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. Protect coils.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide complete change of lubricating oil.

B. Provide one (1) set of extra filters for each unit, in addition to filters in units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


I. Daiken


2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION


A. The ductless split system shall consist of a wall mounted indoor section with wired, wall mounted controller and a horizontal discharge with single phase outdoor unit. Outdoor unit shall be precharged with R-41Oa refrigerant and capable of operating at O°F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section.

B. The connected indoor unit must be of the same capacity as the outdoor unit.

C. Construction and Ratings: Rated in accordance with ARI 210/240 or ARI 365 as appropriate and constructed in accordance with UL standards. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 14.

D. Performance Ratings: Seasonal Energy Efficiency Rating (SEER) as scheduled (not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90A).

2.3 UNIT CABINET (INDOOR)

A. The indoor unit cabinet shall be wall-mounted by means of a factory supplied mounting plate.

B. The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with front panel access for filter.

C. The unit shall be factory assembled, wired, and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor.

D. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment from the factory.

2.4 FAN (INDOOR)

A. The fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive.

B. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

C. Fan shall have multiple speeds available.

D. Accessories as scheduled on the drawings

2.5 VANE (INDOOR)

A. There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement selected by the remote control.

2.6 FILTER (INDOOR)

A. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable and washable filter.

2.7 COIL (INDOOR)

A. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated aluminum strake fins on copper tUbing. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver alloy. Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.

B. A condensation pan shall be provided under the coil.

1339


2.8 UNIT CABINET (OUTDOOR UNIT)


A. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, pipe, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory.

B. House components in galvanized steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish.

C. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is opened.

D. Provide removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners.

2.9 COIL (OUTDOOR UNIT)

A. Coils: Aluminum fms mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Seal with holding charge of nitrogen refrigerant.

B. Coil Guard: PVC coated steel wire

2.10 FANS AND MOTORS (REFER TO SECTION 15170)

A. Vertical or horizontal discharge direct driven propeUer type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge.

B. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or 3 phase, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built in current and thermal overload protection.

C. Motors as indicated.

2.11 COMPRESSORS (OUTDOOR UNIT)

A. Compressor: Hermetic reciprocating type or hermetic scrol1 type.

B. Mounting: Sratical1y and dynamically balance rotating parts and mount on spring vibration isolators.

C. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load.

D. Unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch.

E. Refrigerant Circuit

F. If manufacturer does not specificaUy prohibit addition of the piping accessories listed below, for each refrigerant circuit, provide:

I. Filter dryer replaceable core type 2. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator 3. Hard shut-off thermal expansion valve kit for maximum operating pressure 4. Insulated suction line 5. Suction and liquid line service valves and gauge ports 6. Charging valve 7. Discharge line check valve 8. Compressor discharge service valve

1339


9. Condenser pressure relief valve 10. Compressor start assist 11. Crankcase heater 12. Cycle protector \3. Time delay relay 14. High pressure switch 15. Low pressure switch


G. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, suction line accumulator, flow control check valve, and solid-state defrost control utilizing thermistors.

2.12 CONTROL

A. The control systems shall consist of two microprocessors, one on the indoor unit and One on the outdoor unit. Field wiring shall run directly from the indoor unit connected to the wall mounted controller with no splices. The control system between the outdoor unit and indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit.

B. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored and after power interruption. The system shall have self-diagnostics ability, including total hours of compressor run time. Diagnostic codes for indoor and outdoor units shall be displayed on the wired controller panel.

C. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capab8ility of monitoring return air temperature and indoor coil temperatnre, receiving and processing commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit.

D. The indoor unit shall be connected to a wall-mounted wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. The wired controller shall have a LCD display.

E. The controller shall have various settings available including, but not limited to: On/Off, temperature adjustment, HeatlAutolCoolfDryiFan modes, timers, fan speed, vane position, louver swing, ventilation, test run, check mode. Temperature shall be displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius.

F. The wired controller shall display operating conditions such as set temperature, room temperature, pipe temperatures, compressor operating conditions, sub cooling, and discharge heat.

G. The control voltage from the wired controller to the indoor unit shall be 12 volts DC.

2.13 PERFORMANCE

A. See schedules on drawings for capacities.

2.14 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONEl\"fS

A. The electrical power of the unit shall be as scheduled on the drawings. The system shall be capable of satisfiictOlY operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts.

B. The power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUSITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Complete structural, mechanical, and electrical connections in accordance with manufucturer's installation instructions.

C. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Division 16.

D. Install units on roof curb as indicated on drawing details.

E. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators. Refer to Section 15535. Comply with ASHRAE 15.

F. Furnish charge of refrigerant and oil.

G. Charge system with refrigerant and test entire system for leaks after completion of installation. Repair leaks, put system into operation, and test equipment performance.

H. Shut·down system if initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative. Repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of first cooling season.

I. Provide cooling season start-up, and winter season shut-down for first year of operation.

J. Provide complete installation of thermostat and all controls.

K. Provide with vibration isolation in accordance with section 15245.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electric wall heaters




TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS SECTION 15835 - 1

C. Section 15970 - Energy Management and Direct Digital Control System

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code




A. Submit in accordance with Section 15000.

B. Product Data: Provide date on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, dimensious, weights, connections, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. List all options and accessories furnished with each fan.

C. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT


B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panels, pipe connections, etc.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1339

I. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

2. Company shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of radiant panels and have catalog performance data and certified test data.

3. Provide minimum on-site factory services specified in this section.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PRo,TEeT NO. 2014·226

TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS SECTION 15835 • 2

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMEl\'TS

A. Products requiring electrical connections: listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: (refer to Section ISOOO-Basic Mechanical Requirements-EquipmentiMaterial Substitutions):

I. Markel 2, Berko 3. Qmark

B. General

I. Heavy duty wall mounted forced air electric heaters of the wattage, voltage and phase as indicated on the plans. The heater shall so be designed to provide an even distribution of heatcd air to the space to be heated by drawing return air in the peripheral area of the heater across and through the element which shall then be discharged from the center section of the heater by means of an electric motor and axial flow fan blade, Heaters shall be surface mounted to extend no more than 5 %" from the finished wall.

C. Enclosure:

!. Heater front shall withstand 10.8 ft.lbs. (324 poundals) impact and 400 lbs, static force applied to an 8 sq. in. area at center grille location with less than 1116" permanent distortion. The combination return and supply grille assembly shall be constructed of 1116" x 3/8" rounded edge horizontal steel louvers which shall be spaced for maximtun opening of~", Louvers shall be welded at every intersection to three evenly spaced 1116" diameter vertical members and completely framed in a heavy gauge natural anodized aluminum extrusion. Front assembly shall be attached to the chassis by hidden tamper· resistant (Allen.head) machine screws. All other parts shall be 16 gauge. Steel zinc coated, both sides finished in a high gloss colored baked enamel.

D. Motor:

I. Motor shall be permanently lubricated unit bearing, totally enclosed shaded pole type with impedance protection, Motors shall operate at no more than 1400 RPM and shall be same voltage as the heater. A protective shield shall surround the motor to separate return air from heated air.

E. Performance:

I, See schedules on drawings

F. Elements:

1339

1. Element assemblies shall consist of two orlhree corrosion resistant steel sheathed type elements mechanically bonded to common corrosion resistant steel fins. Each sheeted


TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS SECTION 15835 - 3

element shall consist of helically coiled nickel chromium alloy resistant wire completely embedded in and surrounded by magnesium oxide, enclosed and wedged into corrosion resistant steel sheaths. Elements shall have 2" cold conductor pins extending into the sheath and shall have a density of no more than 60 watts per inch.

G. Thermal Overload:

1. Heaters shall be equipped with a "zero voltage reset" thermal overload which disconnects elements and motor in the event normal operating temperatures are exceeded. For safety, if opened due to abnormal temperature, thermal overload shall remain open until manually reset by turning heater off for five minutes. Automatic reset thermal overloads which allow the element to continue to cycle under abnormal conditions will not be accepted.

H. Approval:

1. Heaters shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. Heaters shall conform to Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. standard 2021, and shall not be required to have any "CAUTION" marking on the front ofthe heater. Heaters not conforming to these paragraphs will not be acceptable.

I. Optional Control Systems:

1. Heaters shall be controlled by integrally mounted thermostats. Thermostats shall be heavyduty, hydraulic type with a range of 40 F to 80 F and with remote sensing bulb placed in the return air. Thermostats shall be electrically rated at least 125% of heater rating. Thermostats shall also act as a disconnect by breaking all ungrounded conductors in the OFF position. Thermostat control knob shall be covered by a 16 gauge. Tamper-proof access plate to prevent adjustment by unauthorized personnel.

J. Circuit Breakers:

1. Heaters shall be equipped with built-in circuit breakers in order to allow the heaters to be supplied from feeder taps. A separate switch providing positive off for control circuits shall be included where required. Circuit breakers and control switches shall be arranged so that all line side conductors will be separately enclosed when heater front is removed for servicing so that no current carrying parts are accessible without the use of additional tools.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 lNSTALLATION


B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Avoid damage.

C. Protection: Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers during balance of construction.

3.2 CLEANING

A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean inside and outside of cabinets if exposed to construction dust.

1339


TERl'\1INAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS SECTION 15835 - 4

B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces offactory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Downblast centrifugal roof exhausters (belt drive)

B. Downblast centrifugal roof exhausters (direct drive)

C. Upblast centrifugal roof exhausters (belt drive)

D. In-line centrifugal fans (belt drive)

E. In-line centrifugal fans (direct drive)

F. Ceiling exhaust fans (direct drive)




C. Section 15170 - Motors

D. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

E. Section 15890 - Ductwork

F. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories

G. Section 15970 - Energy Management and Control Systems

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook

B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes

POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 15870 - 1

C. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal

D. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices

E. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices

F. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators

G. UL 705 - Power Ventilators


A. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, dimensions, weights,

1339


POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 15870·2

connections, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. List all options and accessories furnished with each fan.


A. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Fan shall be manufactured by a Company regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and who issues complete catalog data.

B. Fans shall not increase motor size or increase noise level, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20 % from specified criteria.

C. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated.


A. Fan performance ratings shall be AMCA certified in accordance with AMCA 210. Fans shall bear the AMCA sticker.

B. Sound ratings shall be AMCA certified in accordance with AMCA 300.

C. All fans shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 705. Fans shall bear the UL listing mark.


A. Supply extra belts and sheaves as required for each fan for use during air balance, at no extra cost to the Owner.

B. Supply one (1) spare set of bells and bearings for each fan at project closeout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Motors shall be in conformance with Section 15170.

B. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

C. Roof Curbs: Where roof curbs are provided for fans, the actual curb selection and height shall be coordinated with roof·insulation thickness to ensure specified or scheduled curb height is the actual height of the curb above the "finished" roof surface.

D. Consult drawings for sizes, model numbers, capacities, electrical characteristics, and accessories.

2.2 GENERAL FANS


I. Acme

1339


2. Briedert 3. Cook 4. Greenheck 5. Penn

B. Downblast Roof Exhausters (Belt Drive)


I. Construction: Heavy gauge spun aluminum housing and hood; rigid internal support structure; aluminum base with continuously welded curb cap comers; integral conduit chase through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to mcilitate wiring connections; open drip-proof motor enclosure; motor and drive assembly shall be in a weathertight compartment and shall be mounted on vibration isolators located outside of the air stream.

2. Wheel: Centrifugal, backward inclined, aluminum fan wheel; precision cast aluminum hub; aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone designed to provide maximum performance and efficiency.

3. Bearings: Permanently lubricated and sealed, or regreasable heavy duty pillow block type; minimum L-50 life in excess of200,OOO hours at maximum catalogued operating speed.

4. Belts and Drives: Oil and heat resistant, non-static type belts; precision ground drive securely keyed to the wheel and motor Shafts; drives shall be sized for 150 % ofthe installed motor horsepower; cast iron, multi-belt sheaves - adjustable for motors up to 5 hp and fixed for motors in excess of 5 hp.

5. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel construction; I Y, inch thick 3 pound density insulation; continuously welded comers; wood nailer; 14 inches minimum height above the "finished" roof surface. Coordinate with height of roof insulation to achieve this minimum; suitable for roof construction and slope.

6. Motorized Backdraft Damper: Extruded aluminum construction; brass bushings; see drawings for motor voltage; voltage shall be verified with Section 15970 and Division 16 prior to ordering. Belimo actuator.

7. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 4 enclosure; water-tight and dust-tight.

C. Downblast Roof Exhausters (Direct Drive)

I. Construction: Heavy gauge spun aluminum housing and hood; rigid internal support structure; aluminum base with continuously welded curb cap comers; integral conduit chase through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections; open drip-proof motor enclosure; motor shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment and shall be separated from the airstream.


3. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel construction; IV, inch thick 3 pound density insulation; continuously welded comers; wood naiJer; 14 inches minimum height above the "finished" roof surface. Coordinate with height of roof insulation to achieve this minimum, suitable for roof construction and slope.

4. Motorized Backdraft Damper: Extruded aluminum construction; brass bushings; see drawings for motor voltage; voltage shall be verified with Section 15970 and Division 16 prior to ordering. Belimo actuator.

5. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 4 enclosure; water-tight and dust-tight.

D. Upblast Roof Exhausters (Direct Drive)

1339

I. Construction: Heavy gauge spun aluminum housing and hood; two-piece top cap with quick release latches for access to the motor compartment; vented motor compartment; rigid internal support structure; aluminum base with continuously welded curb cap comers;


POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 15870 • 4

integral conduit chase through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections; open drip-proof motor enclosure; motor assembly shall be in a weathertight compartment and shall be located outside of the air stream,


3. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel construction; IV, inch thick 3 pound density insulation; continuously welded comers; wood nailer; 14 inches minimum height above the "finished" roof surface, Coordinate with heigh! of roof insulation to achieve this minimum; suitable for roof construction and slope.

4. Motorized Backdraft Damper: ExtrUded aluminum construction; brass bushings; see drawings for motor voltage; voltage shall be verified with Section 15970 and Division 16 prior to ordering. Belimo actuator.

S. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 4 enclosure; water-tight and dust-tight. 6. Motor: Rated for variable speed drives.

E. Centrifugal In-Line Fans (Belt Drive)

I. Construction: Heavy gauge galvanized steel; insulated housing; square duct mounting collars on inlet and outlet; minimum of two removable panels providing adequate service access to all internal parts.


3. Bearings: Permanently lubricated and sealed, or regreasable heavy duty pillow block type; minimum L-50 life in excess of200,000 hours at maximum catalogued operating speed.

4. Belts and Drives: Oil and heat resistant, non-static type belts; precision ground drive securely keyed to the wheel and motor shafts; drives shall be sized for 150 % of the installed motor horsepower; cast iron, multi-belt sheaves - adjustable for motors up to 5 hp and fixed for motors in excess of 5 hp.

5. Motor CoverlBelt Guard: Galvanized steel construction; adequate for protection of motors, drives, and personnel.

6. Safety Screens: Galvanized mesh safety screens provided on all un-ducted inlet and discharge openings. Screens shall be easily removable for maintenance and inspection.

7. Motorized Backdraft Damper (When Scheduled): Extruded aluminum construction; brass bushings; see drawings for motor voltage; voltage shall be verified with Section 15970 and Division 16 prior to ordering.

8. Vibration Isolation: Spring and neoprene isolators consisting of a steel spring in series with a neoprene isolation element; sized to match each fun; designed to support five times overload without fallure and allow up to 15 degrees of hanger rod misalignment; hanging isolators for suspended fans and base isolators for floor-mounted fans

9. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 1 lockable enclosure.

F. Ceiling Exhaust Fans (Direct Drive)

I. Galvanized steel casing; insulated housing; integral aluminum backdraft damper; terminal box with cord, plug and receptaele to facilitate removal of complete fan wheel and motor assembly without disturbing the ductwork; permanently lubricated motor with built-in thermal overload protection; powder painted white steel gri lle; provide hanging vibration isolators when using for in-line applications; variable speed controller allowing operation from 50 to 100 % when called for on the drawings.

2. Disconnect switch.

1339


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.llNSTALLATION

A. General


I. Provide in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and as indicated on the drawings. 2. Install flexible connections as specified in Section 15245 between fan and ductwork. Ensure

metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum I inch flex between ductwork and fun While running.

B. Roof Exhausters

I. Secure roof exhausters to roof curb with lag screws. 2. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. 3. Install gasket between fan and curb. 4. Roofand roof flashing not in Division 15.

C. Centrifugal In-Line Fans

I. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.

END OF SECfION 15870

1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Disposable, extended area panel filters.




C. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment

AIR CLEANING DEVICES SECTION 15885 -1

B. ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter

C. UL 586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate Air Filter Units

D. UL 900 - Test Perfonnance of Air Filter Units


A. Provide Commissioning support as specified in Section 15996 and related documents

1.5 PERFORMANCE TOLERANCES

A. Conform to ARI 850 Section 7.4

B. Dust Spot Efficiency: Plus Or minus 5 %


A. Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter frames, and dimensions, motor locations and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for operation, changing, and periodic cleaning.


A. In addition to the filters required for operating the equipment, provide an extra set offilters for each piece of equipment.


A. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer. Exception: I inch thick panel filters and washable permanent filters.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2DI4·2:Ui

AIR CLEANING DEVICES SECTION 15885 - 2

B. Assemble filter components 10 form filter banks from products of one manufacturer.

C. Filter access shall be designed so filter can be replaced without use of tools.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Manufacturers (Refer to Seclion 15000)

I. Farr 2. Cambridge 3. American Air Filter

2.2 TYPE I-DISPOSABLE, EXTENDED AREA PANEL FILTERS (30·;' EFFICIENT)

A. UL 900 Class 2 media, pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton and synthetic fabric, supported and bonded to welded wire grid; rigid, heavy duty frame, high wet strength beverage board ASHRAE 52 rated; 25 to 30% dust spot efficiency; 90 to 92% weight arrestance (MERV 8).

B. Basis of Design: Farr 30/30.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated.

B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.

C. Do not operate fan system until fillers (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set.

D. Refer to Section 15000 and 15005 for filters for temporary heating and ventilating. Filters shall not be less than Farr 30/30.

E. Provide filter gauges on filter banks at all air handling units installed with separate static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. (To be factory furnished with air handling unit.)

1. Unitary or packaged equipment with filters do not require gauges unless noted.

F. Provide filters in accordance with schedule.

3.2 SCHEDULES Equipment Filter Type Packaged Rooftop Units 2" MER V 8 (30%) Type 1 Rooftop Makeup Air Ullits 4" MERV 8 (30%) Type I


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


A, General Materials

B. Flexible ducts

C. Low velocity ductwork and fittings



B. Section 15010- Project Finalization


D. Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation

E. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories

F. Section 15940 -Air Outlets and Inlets


A. Commissioning Support - 15996,

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel

DUCTWORK SECTION 15890 - 1

B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles

C. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

D. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality

E. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process

F. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality

G. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

H. ASTME 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material

1. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating systems

J. NFPA 91 - Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal or Conveying

K. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. Z014·226

L. SMACNA· HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Meta! and Flexible

M. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

DUCTWORK SECTION 15890 • 2

A. Drawings showing duct arrangements are diagrammatic only and do not attempt to show all offsets and fittings required. The contractor shall adjust the work as required to facilitate installation, COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURE AND OTHER TRADES. See Section 15000, " "Locations".

B. If changes of duct configuration or sizes are required to facilitate installation, obtain written permission from Owner's Representative before proceeding with :fabrication and installation.


A. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. [nclude date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Furnish for O&M Manual.

B. Submit manufactured medium pressure ductwork and fittings.


A. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.


A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA " HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. "Latest Edition.

B. Maintain one copy of document on site.


A. Construct ductwork to the International Mechanical Code, and SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, Latest Edition

B. In addition to the above standards, construct ductwork from product conveying exhaust systems to NFP A 91 standards.

C. Where more than one standard is referenced, the most restrictive shall apply.

1.10 ENVIRONMEt"lTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO, 2014-226

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MATERIALS


A, Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Sealants for metal ductwork:

1. Sealant Class A, Band C; Hardcast, Duradyne, Ductmate, or approved equal: 2. Exterior Systems;

a. Hardcast Inc. DT-Tape and RTA-50 adhesive two-part sealing system or Hardcast Inc. Aluma - Grip 701 pressure sensitive rolled sealant tape.

3, Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials. 4. Sealant shall be compositely tested for fire and smoke ha2ard ratings according to recognized

standard testing methods (ASTM E84) and shall have ratings not exceeding flame spread 25, fuel contributed 50 and smoke developed 50.

5. Sealants used on all non-exterior ductwork shall be water based (no solvents)

C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; galvanized steel; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.

2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers (Refer to Section 15000);

1. Genflex 2. Thermaflex 3. Thermold 4. Wiremold 5. Hart and Cooley

B. Basis of Design: Thermaflex, Model G-KM

C. UL 181 Class 1 flexible air duct complying with NFPA standard 90A; factory fabricated assembly composed of an inner liner, coated wound spring steel wire, I inch thick fiberglass insulation (installed R-value 4.3), and a vapor barrier outer jacket; 6 inches WG positive working pressure and 1 inch WG negative working pressure for ducts up to 10 inch diameter, 4 inches WG positive working pressure and I inch WG negative working pressure for ducts 12 to 16 inches diameter; 4000 FPM maximum working velocity; 20 to 200 OF working temperatures.

2.3 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Low velocity ductwork shall be defined as all ductwork not specifically defined as medium velocity ductwork.

B. Fabricate, install, and support in accordance with SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible, the International Mechanical Code, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

1339



C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than I Y, times width of duct on centerline. Provide turning vanes in all rectangular elbows greater than 45 degrees (unless utilized for return duct stub-outs into return air plenums - no vanes required).

D. Increase duel sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

E. Low velocity plenums

1. Plenums shall be alleast two gauges heavier than specified ductwork of equal size. 2. Provide access doors to service equipment. Fabricate with 16 gauge steel double wall

construction with I inch thick fiberglass insulation in core. Openings shall be reinforced with welded angle bar frames. Doors shall be pulled airtight on neoprene gaskets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION-GENERAL

A. Provide in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as specified for the specified pressure class and sealant class.

C. Duct Sizes are gross outside dimensions. Where ductwork is indicated on the drawings to be lined, an allowance for I inch insulation has been included and duct sizes to not need to be increased to compensate for the insulation. Note: Internally insulated ductwork incorporating 2 inches of internal lining has been utilized in selected locations as noted on the drawings (duct sizes do not need to be increased to compensate for the 2 inch insulation).

D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.

G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

H. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with three foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.

1. Low velocity plenums:

1339

I. Construct with angle iron framing suitably reinforced to prevent sagging, breathing or vibration. The building structure shall not be used as walls or ceilings or plenums unless specifically indicated. All portions of the plenwns shall be V, inch minimum clearance from building structure.


DUCTWORK SECTION 15890· 5

2. Where plenums are indicated to be fastened to the building floor, plenum construction shall be angle iron frame bolted to the floor with caulking compound applied before tightening.

3. When plenums are not indicated to be set on the floor, the bottom ofthe plenum shall have additional angle iron bracing than required by ducts of the same size. Connect air inlets and outlets to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.

J. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts wiih duct sealer and secured over sheet metal collar with l1z inch wide positive locking strap.

K. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

L. Paint ductwork visible through air inlets and outlets flat black.

M. Make required offsets and transitions in ductwork in accordance with Section 15000 (,'Locations") and this section. Offsets shall be the least angle possible. Changes shall be submitted to the Owner's representative in shop drawing form before proceeding with the work SO that the effects of offsets on system performance can be evaluated.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Ducts which accumulate dust and debris during construction shall be cleaned by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

L Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

2. Ductwork which does not become clean by the above method shall be cleaned with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Provide duct materials in accordance with schedule below.

B. Apply sealants to all ductwork in accordance with the schedule.

I. Spiral lock seams in round and flat oval ductwork do not require sealing, however, other seams shall be sealed.

2. Fittings and joints that are continuously welded ductwork do not require sealant.

C Ductwork Material and Pressure Class Schedule Pressure Class

Air System (inchesWG) Low Velocity 2 Positive or Negative

D. Sealants - Metal Ductwork

1. See schedule on drawings. Field Quality Control

E. Testing (Refer to Section 15010)

1339

Material Galvanized Steel



1. Duct systems up to 2 inches WG (low velocity) shall be tested as follows:

a. The low pressure supply ductwork, return air, relief air, exhaust air and outside air ductwork systems shall be sealed and leakage tested so that the leakage rate at the design pressure does not exceed 6 percent of the fan flow. Leakage rate shall be determined by field verification and diagnostic testing, in accordance with SMACNA Duct Leakage Test Procedures, 1985.

b. Air leakage measured by a calibrated orifice type flow meter.

2. Prior to testing, the Owner may retain the services of the Northwest Sheet Metal Inspection Services to insure ductwork installation is in confonnance with the specifications and specified industry standards. Contractor shall inform Owner's Representative two weeks prior to testing for scheduling this service.

3. Perform tests in the presence ofthe Owner's Designated Representative. Owner's Representative shall sign test reports as witness. Submit final reports for inclusion in O&M Manual.


1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX Y AKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air turning devices

B. Duct access doors

C. Duct test holes

D. Volume control dampers

E. Spin-in fittings


A. Section 15000 -Basic Mechanical Requirements


C. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

D. Section 15890 - Ductwork

E. Section 15970 - Energy Management and Control Systems

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

B. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible


DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910 - 1



A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers, and combination fire/smoke dampers.




A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1339

CMIPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.


A. Provide two (2) of each size and type of fusible link.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES


1. Duro Dyne 2. AerolDyne 3. Titus 4. Tuttle and Bailey 5. lCrueger 6. Pottorff

B. Fabrication in accordance with SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Standard-Metal and Flexible suitable for duct pressure classification.

C. Multi-blade device with single vane blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.

D. Vanes installed in ductwork of unequal widths or angles shall have vanes shaped to project airflow parallel to duct sides.

2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS


1. Elmdor 2. United McGill 3. Duro Dyne 4. Cesco 5. Pottorff 6. Ruskin

B. Fabricated in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets, qUick fastening locking devices, and continuous piano hinge. For insulated ductwork, install minimum I inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

1. Less than 12 inches square: Secure with sash locks 2. Up to 18 inches square: Secure with two sash locks

1339



3. Up to 24x48 inches: Secure with two compression latches with outside and inside handles

D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.3 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory filbricated, air tight flanged flttings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

2.4 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS


1. Ruskin 2. Greenheek 3. Pottorff

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Single Blade Dampers:

1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 12 inches high and 30 inches long. Dampers greater than 12 inches high shall be multi-blade.

2. Blades shall have 118 inch clearance all around and shall operate within duct liner. 3. Up to 18 inches long, 20 gauge galvanized steel with 318 inch rod pins and quadrant. 4. 19 to 48 inches long, 16 gauge galvanized steel with !4 inch rod pins and quadrant.

D. Multi-Blade Damper:

1. Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade length of 48 inches. Dampers with blade lengths exceeding 48 inches shall be sectioned horizontally.

2. Blades shall have 118 inch clearance all around and shall operate within duct liner. Provide a channel spacer the thickness of the duct liner.

3. Blades shall not exceed 9 inches high and shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel with 318 inch pins and quadrant.

4. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

E. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearIngs. Ventlock #607, Duro Dyne or approved equal.

F. Quadrants:

1339

I. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. Quadrant shall clearly indicate tile position of the damper. Where rod lengths exceed 30

inches provide regulator at both ends.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STA.TE PROJECT NO. 2014-226


3. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. Ventlock #637 for insulated ducts and Ventlock #635 for un-insulated ducts, Duro Dyne, or approved equal.

G. Dampers located above ceilings and in non-accessible locations shall be equipped with Ventlock #666 concealed regulator. Miter gears and universal joints shall be used if required.

2.5 SPIN-IN FITTINGS


1. Air Control Products 2. Duro Dyne

B. Sheet metal conical spin-in type round branch take-off complete with manual damper with locking quadrant.

C. Air Control Products model S-SM-C for sheet metal ductwork and model S-DB-C with damper for lined ductwork.

D. Where rectangular duct sizes do not allow a conical fitting, a straight tap shall be substituted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15890 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Access doors shan be maximum size to fit ductwork up to 24 inches square for duct sizes larger than 24 inches. Provide larger size access doors where indicated on drawings. Review locations prior to fabrication.

C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

D. Install dampers with sufficient clearance from duct transitions and other equipment to prevent binding. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust duct systems as required for air balancing as indicated on the plans. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off. Install concealed damper and regulator and coverplate where dampers are located above inaccessible ceilings.

E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether they are shown on the drawings and regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly (exception is underground ductwork).

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX Y AKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO.lOI4-226


F. Provide spin-in fittings to connect rigid or flexible low pressure round ducts to rectangular ductwork.

G. Provide air turning devices as specified in Section 15890. Not required in short return air transfer ducts which transfer air from a room to a ceiling plenum or from one room to another.

H. Temperature control dampers furnished under Section 15970 shall be installed under this section.

\. Provide access doors (in building walls, ceilings) as required to access ductwork accessories unless indicated to be provided under other Divisions. Access doors sball comply with Section 08311.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL

l.l SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers

B. Roof cowls


A. Section 09910 - Painting



1.3 REFERENCES

A. ADC 1062 • Certification, Rating and Test Manual

B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters

C. ARJ 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 15940 • 1

D. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing fur Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets

E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard· Metal and Flexible




A. Product Data:

1. Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission.

2. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type and accessories. 3. Submit performance data for each type of outlet. Performance data shall show airflows,

pressure drops and noise criteria for each size of diffuser.


A. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.


A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. ~014-~26

1.8 DRAWING SCHEDULES

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 15940 - 2

A. Refer to drawings for specific capacities, dimensions, accessories, and other requirements supplemental to these specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. General

I. Dampers: Provided when scheduled on the drawings. Dampers shall be opposed blade, heavy gauge steel, and shall be adjustable from the face of the inlet or outlet

2. Frame types and mounting hardware: Coordinated with ceiling types. Architectural plans shall take precedence when referencing ceiling types, and Contractor shall refurence the architectural plans for verification of ceiling type prior to ordering.

3. Finish: White unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

B. General Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers


a. Titus b. Tuttle & Bailey c. Anemostat d. Krueger e. Price f. Pottorff

2. See schedules on drawings.

2.2 ROOF COWLS


1. Greenheck

B. Construction: Heavy gauge aluminum; precision formed arched panels with interlocking seams, sloped roofs galvanized steel hood support members fastened so the hood can be removed completely or hinged open; integral counterflashing; and birdscreen with Y, inch13 mm square mesh.

C. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel construction; 1"" inch thick 3 pound density insulation; continuously welded corners; wood nailer; 18 inch minimum heigbt above the finished roof surface; suitable for roof construction and slope. Where roof curbs are factory provided, the actual curb selection and heigbt shall be coordinated with roof-insulation thickness to ensure specified or scheduled curb height is the actual height of the curb above the "finiShed" roof surface.

D. Furnish motorized damper. Coordinate with Section 15970 and schedule on drawings. Belimo

E. Basis of Design: Greenheck Fabrahood

1339


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 15940 - 3

A. Provide in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Locate air outlets and inlets in accordance with architectural reflected ceiling plan when indicated.

C. Counterflashing for all roof mounted equipment shall be the responsibility of this section and shall be completely coordinated with the roofing contractor.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers

I. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. 2. When round ductwork connects to diffusers with square necks, install with a square to round

adapter. 3. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless

of whet her dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly and regardless of whether they are shown on the drawings.

4. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09910. 5. Fasten all pan style diffusers in lay-in ceilings with earthquake tabs.


1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COl\fPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970-1 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Energy Management and Control System (EMCS)

B. Air Measuring Stations

C. Control Valves

D. Controllers

E. Temperature Control Dampers

F. Un interruptible Power Supply (UPS)

G. General Components

l.2 RELATED SECTIONS


B. Section 15005 - Sustainable Building Construction

C. Section 150 to - Project Finalization



F. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment

G. Section 15624- - Indirect Fired Air Units

H. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties

I. Section 15786 - Ductless Split Air Conditioning Units

J. Section 15835 - Terminal Heat Transfur Units

K. Section 15870 Power Ventilators

1. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories

M. Section 15971 - Variable Frequency Drives

N. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

O. Section 15996 - Commissioning Support

1.3 REFERENCES

A. UL 916 - Underwriters Laboratories Standard fur Energy Management Equipment

1339


ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTlON 15970 - 2

B. NBC - National Electrical Code

C. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase



1.5 DESCRIPTION

A. The specification is intended to cover equipment, labor, materials and services sufficient to result in a complete Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) capable of controlling and monitoring the complete mechanical system with owner training as outlined in the drawings and in these specifications.

B. EMCS manufacturer shall be responsible for all EMCS and temperature control wiring for a complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance with a1110cal and national codes and Division 16. This includes all low voltage wiring as well as line voltage wiring required for control power purposes.

1.6 SUBMTIT ALS FOR REVIEW (REFER TO SECTION 15000)

A. General

I. Drawings shall be standard sizes: gv,x II inch, Ilx 17 inch, 24x36 inch.

B. Provide temperature controls submittals with the following tabbed sections:

I. Statements of Conformance Section 2. Floor Plan Wiring and Component Section

a. Provide floor plans that indicate the location of primary control components such as operator work stations, equipment controllers/main panelS, unitary (terminal unit) controllers, and associated controlled equipment (boilers, chillers, air handlers, etc.).

b. Provide a network communications (LAN) wiring diagram showing connectivity between control devices.

3. System Interface Section

a. Provide graphic systems schematics and flow diagrams.

1339

b. Provide a complete points list, indicating the plain English description that will be utilized in EMCS programming and the type of point (analog input, analog output, digital input, digital output).

c. Provide a complete list of adjustable points, including range of adjustment and initial setting.

d. Provide a complete list of alarms, including level of alarm and resulting action. e. Provide a description of the sequences of operation as understood by the controls

contractor. This description shall be in the general format of the programming for the controls system, but shall be in narrative form. Copied sequences from the control diagrams are not acceptable.

4. System Wiring Diagram Section


ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 15970 - 3

a. Provide a system schematic layout showing all operator's terminals, equipment controllers, unitary controllers, equipment and systems interface devices, etc. as required for a complete system. The equipment served by each device shall be indicated in the schematic. Individual inputs and outputs shall not be included in this schematic. Each device shown in this schematic shall be cross-referenced to both the individual component schematic as well as the submittal information for that device type. Wiring between devices shall also be cross-referenced to its submittal information.

b. Provide individual component schematics for each controller. These schematics shall indicate each device input and output. The available number and type of spare points for each controller as installed as well as the expand ability of the device shall be indicated in the schematic.

5. EMCS Software Section

a. At a minimum, this section shall address each requirement noted in these specifications for the EMCS software.

6. Graphical User Interface Section

a. Provide a representation of the graphical penetration scheme as outlined in these specifications. This can be in the form of a simple flow diagram.

b. Provide a representation of how points and schedules are accessible through the graphical interface.

c. Provide a representation of how the system programming is accessible through the graphical user interface.

d. Provide information on the graphics development package. e. Provide graphic floor plan displays for all spaces. Include a representation of each of

the required space temperature indicators. f. Provide a table of occupied heating, occupied cooling, unoccupied heating and

unoccupied cooling setpoints for each temperature control zone. Setpoint criteria shall be obtained from the OWner prior to submission of submittals. This table shall be a verification of these criteria.

g. Provide a table of the warm-upfpre-cool, occupied and unoccupied scheduling for each temperature control zone. Scheduling criteria shall be obtained from the owner prior to submission of submittals. This representation shall be a verification of these criteria.

7. Web Browser Interface Section

a. At a minimum, this section shall address each requirement noted in these specifications for the EMCS software.

1339

8. Interface Wiring Diagrams Section

a. Provide schematics for each point of interface to other systems or packaged equipment controls.

b. For interfaces not specified to receive integration devices, provide the following at a minimum:

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970 - 4 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

I) Schematics showing the location of all terminal strips and/or connection points between systems (including room designation, location within room, control panel designation, etc. as appropriate).

2) Notation of contractor responsible for hardware (terminal strips, contacts, etc.), wiring and terminations.

3) A description of each point including plain English functional description, electrical characteristics (0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 rnA, N/O dry contact, NIC dry contact, etc.).

c. For interfuces specified to receive integration devices, provide the following at a minimum:

I) Schematics showing the location of the integration device (including room designation, location within room, control panel designation, etc. as appropriate).

2) Notation of contractor responsible for integration device, wiring and terminations.

3) A description of the information that will be transferable through the integration device, including read/write capabilities.

d. Each schematic shall be reviewed, approved and noted as such bY both the temperature controls contractor and an authorized agent of the system or equipment requiring interface.

e. At a minimum, a wiring diagram shall be provided for each interface noted in the Systems and Equipment Interfaces section of these specifications.

9. Components Section

a Provide submittal information for each system hardware component, including the operator's terminal, all controllers, required systems and equipment internee devices, measurement and control devices. Measurement devices shall include units of measurement, range of measurement and accuracies.

b. Provide a control damper and damper actuator sizing schedule. c. Provide a complete recommended spare parts list for the controls system.


A. Provide "as-built" documentation of all information required for original system and equipment submittals as outlined above. Information shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals as outlined below.

B. In addition to inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals, the points list, adjustable points list, and alann points list, as required in the systems control section of the submittals, shall be laminated in plastic after approval by Owner's Representative. One copy shall be posted at the main control cabinet of the building and the second copy shall be given to the Owner.

I. Points list shall identify BACnet information and address for each point for use in the future by other BACnet manufacturers.


A. The Energy Management and Controls System section shall include the following sub-sections:

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNllY COLLEGE SECTION 15970 - 5 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

1. An individual section for each system. These sections shall include as-built documentation of the information required in the Systems Interface section of the submittals_

2. Systems Wiring Diagrams Section. This section shall include as-built documentation of the information required in the Systems Wiring Diagrams section of the submittals.

3. Interface Wiring Diagrams Section. This section shall include as-built documentation of the information required in the Interface Wiring Diagrams section of the submittals.

4. Components Section. This section shall include as-built documentation of the information required in the components section of the submittals_

1_9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (REFER TO SECTION 15000)

A. Store products in shipping containers in clean, dry location until installation.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

1.10 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer's/Control Contractor's Qualifications: The EMCS Contractor shall be a firm that is a factory authorized representative of the manufacturer of the automation and control equipment products, and that is experienced in the design and installation of systems similar in nature to this project, with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Building automation and temperature control work shall be done by specialty mechanics in the employ of a EMCS contractor who specializes in this work and are factory trained to install the products of the manufacturer of the automation and control equipment. Installer shall have previous experience installing and programming BACnet system and controllers.

C. Project ManagerlEngineer's Qualifications: The qualifications of the EMCS Contractor's proposed project manager/engineer shall be submitted in writing within the time frame of the submittals. The EMCS Contractor's engineer shall have a minimum offive (5) year's experience in the automation and control field with the same company furnishing the work, as well as having been involved in the design and construction of three (3) projects of similar size and scope_ The Owner reserves the right to approve the proposed project engineer from the control contractor's staff. The project manager/engineer shall be designated as a key personnel and shall remain assigned to the project through its entire duration of submittals, construction and warranty. The project manager shall be the contactor's and Owner's primary contact

D. The EMCS Contractor shall have local emergency service available on a 24 hour, 7 day-a-week basis, with a normal response time from contact to arrival on site of not more than two (2) hours.

1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Complete the 96-hour test run (see paragraph 3.7) prior to test and balance.

B. Pre-balance inspection and adjustment of the control systems shall be performed by the control engineer in the presence of the Engineer_ This operation shall be performed prior to the start of the air and water balance work. Pre-balance inspection and adjustment shall include adjustments of all controls and devices as required to prove sequence of operation in all control modes. A written report,

1339



signed by participating parties shall be forwarded to the Owner's Representative with a copy enclosed in the O&M manual.

C. The temperature controls contractor shall assist the balancing agency as required for proper balancing as required in Section 15010. Furnish a hand-held controller or laptop service tool for the balance agency use during test and balance. This tool shall become the property of the Contractor at the end of lest and balance.

D. Final adjustments and calibration of systems and components, including valve and damper operators, shall be accomplished after balancing has been completed and prior to O&M instruction period. This shall include any required setting of controls or labeling of setpoints. The EMCS Contractor shall coordinate scheduling and setpoints with Ov.'Iler's Representative. A letter of certifiCation, stating the above has been completed and signed by the EMCS Contractor shall be forwarded to the Owner's Representative with a copy enclosed in the O&M manual. The Owner's Representative Shall be notified, in writing, two (2) weeks in advance of scheduled time to witness sequence of operation on all systems. All systems shall be fully operational at the time of this demonstration.

E. See Section 15010 for additional requirements.

1.12 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. It is the responsibility of the EMCS contractor to communicate all specific needs for proper installation and operation of the EMCS system to all other necessary trades and to verifY that those provisions will be made under the terms of this contract without additional cost to the owner.

S. Coordinate closely with other subcontractors and equipment suppliers to ensure that equipment is provided with features necessary to interface with the EMCS system.

C. Coordinate and schedule work with all other work in the same area or with work which is dependent upon work by other trades to facilitate mutual progress.

D. The EMCS Contractor's designated project engineer/manager shall attend the regularly scheduled construction meetings as requested by the General Contractor in response to current construction activities and shall be familiar with the technical aspects of the EMCS design and capabilities.

1.13 OWNER TRAINING (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Two (2) separate on-site training sessions shall be provided, one prior to substantial completion and shall provide the specified hours of training in Section 15010. The second training shall occur prior to the end of the first year ofservice in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010.

B. Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) hours until the training hours have been fulfilled.

C. Control Engineer shall provide 6 hours of on-site training. In the event that this is not required by the Owner, substitute six (6) hours of programming 'or extended training for other areas of work on campus as directed by YVCC facilities.

D. Training shall be conducted by an engineer familiar with the specific design of the system provided for this project.

E, Training sessions shall include all necessary people including the controls system programmer, the controls components installer, and other representatives as necessary to access equipment and components and for clarification of interfaces with other systems.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970-7 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

F. At a minimum, the on-site training sessions shall cover the following information:

1. General system information:

a. Understanding and utilizing the operation and maintenance manuals and as-built documents

b. Basic system architecture c. Utilizing the operator's interface d. Setting up, viewing and printing trend logs and alarm histories e. Backing up the system f. Modifying and customizing system graphics g. Control loop tuning

2. Floorplan Interface:

a Provide a presentation of how to navigate through the floorplan interfaces. b. Describe the graphical representation of spaCe temperatures. c. Demonstrate how to access system graphics from the floorplan graphics.

3. Systems Interface (Provide the following for each individual system):

a. Provide a presentation of how the sequence of operation has been implemented. b. Show the location in the graphics of each viewable input and output. c. Show the location in the graphics of each adjustable sctpoint, including the procedure

for adjusttnent. d. Show the graphic presentation of each system alarm.

4. Components:

a. Show the actual location for each sensor, control system device and control panel. b. Show procedure for any required maintenance of components, as well as replacement

procedures as appropriate.

1.14 MAINTENANCE SERVICES

A. Complete service as required, including, but not limited to, a minimum of three (3) service inspections of all control systems during the first year following acceptance of the work. The inspections shall be scheduled as close as possible to the beginning ofthe heating and cooling seasons with the fmal inspection just prior to the expiration of the warranty period. These inspections are in addition to any warranty calls that are required during the warranty period Documentation shall be forwarded to the Owner's Representative with a copy to the Design Engineer at the completion of each trip.

1.15 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. General

I. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, equipment controllers, unitary controllers, and operator devices while re-using the existing controls equipment.

2. The EMCS shall utilize an open architecture and fully support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the EMCS shall not only utilize open communication protocol

1339



standards, but also be able to integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications via existing vendor protocols and through the latest software standards.

3. Each equipment controller shall operate independently by performing its OWn specified control, alarm management, and historical data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

B. Ethernet Communication: All equipment controllers, the operator's workstation, and other devices not connected downstream of equipment controllers shall communicate over a 10Base-T (or faster) Ethernet communications network.

1.16 NATIVE BACNET SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, equipment controllers, unitary controllers, and operator devices while re-using the existing controls equipment.

B. The EMCS shall utilize native BACnet architecture as referenced by ANSIfASHRAE Standard 135-1995.

C. The communication network between controllers shall be BACnet. All controllers shall utilize native BACnet architecture and shall be independently tested and listed through BACnet Testing Laboratories. See http://www.bacnetassociation.org/btl.

1.17 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT INTERFACES

A. General: Provide interfaces/integration with these microprocessor-based systems and packaged equipment as indicated on the control drawings. Coordinate closely with the respective subcontractors and their equipment suppliers to ensure that the necessary interface is provided with each piece of equipment.

1.18 COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENT

A. See Section 15996 for commissioning requirements related to this section of work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS)

A. Native BACnet System Manufacturers and installers (Refer to Section 15000 and this Section paragraph 1.10, A)

1. Alterton BACTalk as installed by ATS Automation

B. Operator's Terminal-Existing tenninallocated in YVCC Facilities Office

C. EMCS Software

1339

I. General

a. The EMCS contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of the EMCS system. Software shall be modular in design to provide maximum

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT ~O. 2014·2Ui


flexibility, expansion, and future revision of the system. All functionality described herein shall be regarded as a minimum.

h. 32-bit software application compatible with the specified operating system; multitasking type environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously.

2. Control Algorithms: The system shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms: Two-position control, proportional control, proportional plus integral control, proportional, integral, plus derivative control, and automatic tuning of control loops.

3. Operator Access: Different security levels shall be assignable to each operator. Each command and event shall be capable of being assigned a security level. Access to commands, acknowledgment of alarms, etc. shall be limited in accordance with the operator's security level designation.

4. Password Protection: Multiple operator-specific password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control.

5. Event Reporting: The operator shall have the capability to define which actions get reported in which manners, both individually and globally through grouping of events (initially, a minimum of three (3) reporting groups shall be designated: urgent alarms, general alarms, and general messages). Reported events shall include a time and date stamp, site location and network address, and alpha-numeric event 10. Anyone or combination of the following event reporting actions shall be assignable to each event: ASCII file, numeric pager (pages personnel by sending numeric messages to personal pagers through the use of a third-party service), printer, and operator's terminal.

6. Trending: Any point, physical or calculated, shall be capable of trending. Collection of data shall be definable by either pre-defined time intervals or pre-defined changes of value. Trending information from anywhere in the system shall be available at the operator's terminal without requiring intervention by an operator.

7. Scheduling: The system shall be capable of scheduling by zone, individual equipment, groups of zones or equipment, building area, and systems. Equipment or zone groups shall be definable by the operator. Weekly schedules shall incorporate seven (7) independent dally programs. System shall also incorporate one-time and annual event scheduling. The system shall automatically update for daylight savings time and leap years. Schedules shaIl be capable of being overridden at the operator's terminal.

8. Optimum Start/Stop: Start and stop equipment on a sliding schedule based on the individual zone temperature and the heating/cooling capacity of the equipment serving that ZOne. The heating/cooling capacity value shall be operator adjustable.

9. Source Temperature Optimization: Automatically perform source temperature optimization for all equipment noted to have temperature setpoints reset by system demand in the control diagrams. Capability shall include resetting of temperature setpoints in accordance with useradjustable parameters as well as starting and stopping of primary mechanical equipment based on zone occupancy and/or zone load conditions. Temperature optimization loops shall be tuned to minimize cycling and maximize system stability.

1339

10. Demand Limiting: The system shall be capable of measuring electrical usage from multiple meters serving one building. Each piece of equipment being controlled shall be programmable to respond to peak demand information. The demand control function shall utilize a sliding window method with the operator being able to establish the kilowatt threshold for a minimum ofthree (3) adjustable demand levels. The operator shall have the capability to set the individual equipment temperature setpoints for each operator defined demand level. Equipment shall not be shed if these reset setpoints are not satisfied. The system shall have fuiled meter protection, generating an alarm upon loss of KW signal.



System shall archive demand and usage information. Information shall be retrievable by day, month-to-date and year-to-date basis.

II. Night Setback: The system shall allow the space temperature to drift down or up within an adjustable unoccupied temperature range. Heating andlor COOling shall be controlled to maintain the night setback range during the scheduled night setback periods.

12. Timed Local Override: When provided with occupant override capabilities the system shall permit the override of equipment which has been scheduled off. Override history shall be maintained for each timed local override input point.

13. Economizer: The system shall be capable of switch over from mechanical cooling to economizer cooling based On outside air temperature. Economizer operation shall be capable of being overridden by the operator.

D. Graphical User Interface

1. Floor Plan and System SelectionlPenetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via both a graphical penetration scheme and menu selection.

a. Graphical penetration scheme: Multiple floor plan displays, when required, shall all be accessible from a single initial screen. System schematics shall be directly accessible from the floor plan display for the area they serve. For zoned systems, both the zone and main system schematics shall be accessible from the floor plan display. For systems that interact with secondary systems andlor equipment (e.g. an air handling unit with a hot water coil served by a heating water system), the secondary system and lor equipment shall be accessible from the primary system schematic. It is the intent ofthis graphical penetration scheme that, from a single screen, any location served by the system can be accessed and, from any floor plan display, all systems andlor equipment serving that area can be accessed.

b. Menu selection: A menu selection shall also be available to the operator, similar in nature and layout to the graphical penetration scheme described above.

2. Floor Plan Displays: Provide color graphic floor plan displays designating each temperature control zone. Each zone shall have a graphic and color-coded indication of space temperature relative to setpoint, with a minimum of five (5) different indicators (e.g. dark blue, light blue, green, yellow, red).

3. System Schematic Displays: Provide color graphic system schematics for all mechanical equipment and systems. Schematics shall be similar in nature to the control diagrams included in the drawings. Each system andlor equipment schematic shall include the following minimum information:

a. System designation b. Graphic representation and labeling of all major equipment and components (aU

scheduled equipment as a minimum)

1339

c. Current status of all 110 points applicable to tbe system (located appropriately for ease of proper association)

4. System Setpoint and Scheduling Adjustments: All system setpoints and schedules shall be adjustable through the graphic interface. This includes all space temperature setpoints, occupiedtunoccupiedlwarm-up schedules, and all points noted in the control diagrams as adjustable. Adjustments shall require only mouse operation and entering of new values. Cbanges shall be automatically transferred to the appropriate control module.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKlMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

ENERGY MANAGEMENT k"lD CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 15970· 11

5. Windowing: The windowing environment of the operator's terminal shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.

6. Programming Accessibility: Programming for sequences of operation shall be accessible through the graphical user interface.

7. Se!point Accessibility: Each ,e!point andlor item indicated in the control diagrams to be adjustable shall be accessible and capable of being modified through the graphical user interface.

8. Graphics Development Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, Or delete system grapblc displays.

a. The contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard HVAC components (e.g. fans, cooling eoils, filters, dampers, etc.) and electrical symbols.

b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following:

1) Define symbols 2) Position and size symbols 3) Define background screens 4) Define connecting lines and curves 5) Locate, orient and size descriptive text, define and display colors for all

elements 6) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points

or other displays

c. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility. To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multiple DDC panels, including application specific controllers used for DDC unitary or VA V terminal unit control.

E. Web Browser Interfuce

1. Compatibility: The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using Internet Explorer. Web browser software shall be compatible with the operating system and system configuration provided.

2. Consistency with GU!: Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the Gm shall be supported by the web browser interface. The browser shall provide the same view of the system as the graphical user interface including graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc. and shall provide the same interface methodOlOgy as the GU!. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules or logs will not be permitted.

3. Security: User identification and password security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. Limitations of user access and eontrol similar to that provided at the operator's tenninal shall be assignable to each user.

l339

4. Editing Capabilities: HTML editing by the operator shall be allowed, but not be required for proper operation.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970 - 12 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

5. Graphics Storage: Graphical screens shall be stored in the server. Systems that require graphics storage on the client machine are not acceptable.

6. Real-Time Data Displays: Values displayed on the web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual refresh of the web page.

7. Links: Graphical screens on the web browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites through the Uniform Resource Locator (URL).

2.2 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Manufilcturers (Refer to Section 15000):

I. Belimo, for air handling unit dampers and other system control dampers. 2. As manufactured by approved lliVlCS manufacturer, for air terminal unit dampers.

Manufacturers who do not have valves and air terminal unit dampers labeled under the Manufacturer's name shall provide Belimo actuators.

B. High resolution type with positive feedback on valve or damper position, direct coupled type.

I. Spring-return operation to fail open or closed upon loss of signal or power when indicated on the drawings as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC), respectively; constructed to maintain last position upon power failure when not specified to be either normally open or normally closed on the drawings.

2. Built-in overload protection to prevent damage to the actuator when the actuator or damper reaches its end position.

3. Designed for a minimum life of 60,000 cycles; selected for compatibility with associated equipment.

4. Damper actuators sized for 50 % safety factor with ample capacity to hold device at an intermediate position.

5. Valve actuators sized for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential pressure. Valve actuators shall be filctory installed on the valves with necessary hold off brackets and shields to protect the actuator from condensation and over-heating.

6. Actuator unit shall be submerged in oil and sealed in die cast case; UL listed; 3 year unlimited warranty.

2.3 AIRFWW MEASURING STATION (THERMAL SENSING STYLE)


1. Ebtron

B. Sensor shall consist of mUltiple probes which utilize thermal dispersion technology with a pressure drop not to exceed 0.05 inches WG at 2,000 FPM with 2 % accuracy between 0 to 5.000 FPM.

C. Probes: Model GP-I. Gold anodized 6061 aluminum probe. hermetically sealed "bead in glass" thermistor sensors, glass filled polypropylene sensor housing, 304 stainless steel duct mounting brackets, plug and play cable in length to suit application.

D. Transmitter: 24 VAC, 20 V-A max power which is fused and protected on the transmitter, display CFM (with area input).

E. Network Configuration: GTX-116-P transmitter with 9600 baud RS485 serial output in BACnet Protocol. interfilce includes airflow or velocity.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970 - 13 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

F. See schedule on drawings for approximate duct sizes and airflows.

G. Submittals: Submit installation instructions with product data. After approval by Owner's Representative, forward a copy to the installing contractor (Section 15910).

2.4 CONTROLLERS


1. As manufactured by approved EMCS manufacturer. 2. Equipment Controllers

a Stand-Alone Operation: Integral processor, software, hardware, firmware, and memory sufficient to perform complete stand-alone control and operation of associated equipment.

b. Expansion: Controllers shall accommodate mUltiple 110 expansion modules for the possibility offuture expansion.

c. Operator's Terminal Interface: All point data, algorithms and application software within a controller shall be custom programmable from the operator's terminal.

d. Self-Diagnostics: Each controller shall include self-diagnostics, which allow the controller to automatically notiiY the network controller of any malfunctions or alarm conditions that exceed desired parameters.

e. Operator's Interface: Each controller shall contain a port for connection ofa porrable computer. The entire system shall be accessible from this port.

3. Unitary Controllers

a Stand-Alone Operation: Upon loss of communication, each unitary controller shall execute its assigned control algorithm in a stand-alone mode.

b. Zone Temperature Sensor Compatibility: Unitary controllers shall support various types of zone temperature sensors including temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with setpoint adjustment, temperature sensor with local override switch, and temperature sensor with setpoint adjustment and local override switch.

c. For applications that require airflow measurement, the unitary controller shall include a precision built-in differential pressure transducer. The differential pressure transducer shall have a measurement range of 0 to 4,000 FPM and measurement accuracy of ±5 % at 400 to 4,000 FPM. Controller shall include provisions for manual and automatic calibration of the differential pressure transducer. Automatic calibration shall occur whenever the system mode switches from occupied to unoccupied bode or vice versa.

d. VA V Applications: Unitary controller shall be provided with either a separate Or

integral direct-coupled electronic actuator. The actuator shall be of the on-offfloating point control. The actuator assembly shall mount directly to the damper operating shaft. The actuator shall be electronically protected against overload.

e. Serviceability: Controller wiring terminal bars shall be of detachable type allowing quick serviceability of the electronic controller hardware without removal of the existing wiring.

2.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DAMPERS


1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX Y AKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2D14·226

I. Air Balance 2. American Warming 3. Ruskin 4. Delta Control Products Class I 5. Tamco

B. Type I-Low Leak, Aluminum, Air Foil

1. Basis of Design; Ruskin CD-50


2. General: Low-leak, airfoil design; extruded aluminum; parallel blade for return air applications and opposed blade for outside and exhaust air applications or as indicated on the drawings.

3. Application:

a. Ducts or systems 3000 cfm and greater and all ductwork constructed to pressure classes greater than 2"

b. Dampers installed in walls or roofs that are not dueted to a fan.

4. Construction

a. Extruded aluminum hat channel frame, 1/8 inch minimum thickness. b. Extruded aluminum airfoil blades with integral structural reinforcing entire length of

blade. c. Extruded vinyl double edge blade seals, easily replaceable; non-corrosive molded

synthetic bearings. d. Square or hexagonal axles for positive locking (round is not acceptable). e. Linkage concealed in frame.

5. Leakage: AMCA certified for leakage of equal to or less than 6 CFMlfoot' at 4 inch WG.

C. Type 2-Low Leak, Galvanized, Non-Airfoil

I. Basis: Ruskin CD-36, CDR-36. 2. General; Low leak, steel frame and blades, parallel blade for return air applications and

opposed blade for outside and exhaust air applications or as indicated on the drawings. 3. Application:

a. Ducts or systems less than 3000 cfro for ductwork construction to 2" pressure class (and less)

4. Construction

a. Galvanized steel hat reinforced hat channel. Minimum 13 gauge. b. Galvanized steel blades.

1339

c. Seals: PVC coated polyester fabric mechanically locked to the blade edge. d. Synthetic bearings. e. Square or hexagonal axles for positive locking (round is not acceptable). f. Linkage concealed in frame,

5. Leakage: AMCA certified for leakage of equal to or less than 7 CFM/foot' at 5" inch WG for a 12" wide damper.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX Y AKlMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014.226

ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 15970 • 15

2.6 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Manufacturers (Refer to 15000):

1. Best Power Technology 2. Liebert 3. Necedan 4. WI

B. Basis of Design: Best Power Technology Ferrups Series

C. Provide an UPS for the operator's terminal and the direct digital controls system (DOC) microprocessor front·end. The UPS shall have an output to the EMCS to alarm the system of normal power loss and recovery.

1. UPS unit shall provide thirty (30) minutes of system operation in the event of 120 volt normal power loss for any reason.

2. The UPS unit shall normally provide power from the battery/inverter source while the battery is under continuous charge by the normal 60 Hz AC power. In the event of an overload on the inverter, the UPS shall automatically and instantaneously transfer from battery/inverter mode to normal 60 Hz AC power mode. When the overload is resolved, the system shall automatically and instantaneously re-synchronize and transfer from normal 60 Hz AC power mode back to battery !inverter mode. In the event of failure of the normal 60 Hz power, the transfer described above shall be initiated, even in the face of an overload. Upon restoration of the normal 60 Hz AC power, the system shall re-enable the transfer to normal 60 Hz AC power. All transfers shall occur in such a manner that they are transparent to both the user and the system except that if the normal 60 Hz AC power fails, an alarm contact closure shall be available which will reset automatically when the normal power source is restored.

3. The UPS unit shall fully recharge backup batteries within eight (8) hours after restoration of AC primary power.

4. Electrical requirements:

a. 120 VAC input b. ±3 % max (10 % to 100 % load) regulation c. 5 % maximum distortion d. 1 Hz Or 4 Hz per second slew e. 250: I from line spike attenuation f. 86 % on line efficiency g. KV A rating, batteries, and output as required

5. Overloads: 125 % for 10 minutes on bypass (to 60 Hz AC); 11 0 % for 10 minutes on inverter (to normal).

2.7 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD'S)

A. Furnished by the EMCS Contractor in Section 15970 in accordance with Section 15971. Exception: VFD's that are specified Or scheduled to be factory furnished with the air handling units.

2.8 GENERAL COMPONENTS

A. Conduit: Conduit shall meet all requirements of the Latest Edition of the National Electrical Code and State Codes and Division 16.

1339



B. Contactors

1. Single coil, electrically operated, mechanically held type 2. Positive locking obtained without the use of hooks, latches or semi-permanent magnets 3. Doubled break silver to silver type protected by arching contact where necessary 4. Number and rating of contacts selected for the intended application 5. Operating and release times shall be 100 milliseconds or less 6. Equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150 % of rated coil

voltage

C. Electronic Transmitters: Temperature sensing elements shall be thermistor or platinum RID type as indicated below.

D. Enclosures: Enclosures shall conform to the requirements ofNEMA 250 for the types specified. Finish color shall be the manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated. Damaged surfaces shall be repaired and refinished using original type finish. Enclosures may be NEMA I when located in a clean dry indoor environment. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean dry environment. Equipment installed outdoors shall be housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure. Penetrations shall be sealed to preclude entry of water using a silicone material. All control panels shall be UL listed for code compliance.

E. Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all equipment and monitoring and control devices in accordance with the requirements of Section 15190. Each nameplate shall identify the function, such as "mixed air controller" or "cold deck temperature sensor". Nameplates shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15190.

F. Power Conditioning

I. Capacity shall match the equipment served 2. Output 120 VAC, +6 to -8 % at 90 to 136 VAC input 3. Maximum 2 % total hannonic wave form distortion 4. 10 million to I common-mode noise attenuation (140dB minimum at 0.0) 5. 57dB normal-mode noise attenuation for 10 Hz to I MHZ 6. Provide for all solid state equipment unless protection meeting these requirements is an

integral part of the equipment.

G. Power Monitors: Three-phase type with three-phase disconnect/shoring switch assembly; UL listed voltage transformers and UL listed split-core current transformers.

H. Relays

1. General:

1339

a. Rated for the intended application b. Minimum of2 sets of Form C contacts c. Enclosed in a dust-proof enclosure d. Rated for a minimum life-cycle of 1,000,000 operations e. 20 milliseconds or less operating time f. 10 milliseconds or less release time g. Equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150 % of rated

coil voltage

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970 - 17 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

2. Enclosed Relays (Relay-in-a-Box) RIB: SPDT enclosed relays with nipple mount for panel applications with LED status pilot light.

3. DIN Socket Control Relays:

a. Plug-in type with dust cover b. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application c. UL listed

4. Time Delay Relays:

a. Solid state plug-in type with adjustable time delay b. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200 % from setpoint called for c. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application d. NEMA I enclosure when not installed in local control panel

I. Sensors

I. General: Sensors and control elements shall be rated for continuous operation under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified or normally encountered for the installed location.

2. Provide wall boxes for sensing elements for conduit rough-in with extension rings if required due to finished surfaces on the walls.

3. Duct Temperature Sensors: Resistor Temperature Detector (RTD) with platinum element and transmitter to match resistance range ofR TD or thermistor type, accuracy of 0.1 % at 32 degrees F.

a. Use averaging type on mixed air plenums and downstream from heating and cooling coils. Averaging type sensor encased in bendable copper sheath of the length required (normally 24 reet long). Serpentine element horizontally.

b. Use direct insertion probe type on return air and supply air ducts. Use 4 inch long probe on terminal box discharge supply ducts. Use 12 inch long probe on main return air and supply air ducts.

4. Low Limit Thermostats (Freezestats): Dual signal low temperature cut-out and alarm tbermostat with remote sensing element. Manual reset type selected for the application. Bulb shall be approximately 20 feet long for use in large ducts or plenums and shall be designed to stop the respective fan should the temperature drop below setpoint along anyone foot length of the bUlb. 15 to 55 degrees F adjustable range.

a. Provide with two sets of contacts. One to hardwire to equipment for shutdown and one for the DDC system for monitoring.

5. Outside Air Temperature Sensors: Resistor Temperature Detector (RTD) or thermistor; -20 OF to 180 OF temperature range, sun shield and weatherproof assembly for mounting to rigid conduit.

a Install away from exhaust/relief vents. Preference should be given to locate as near as possible to the outside air intake for the air handling equipment, but keeping it out of direct sunlight or other reflective sources that would adversely affect its accuracy. When possible the sensor should be located on the northwest outside building wall.

6. Room Temperature Sensors:

1339



a. 10K ohm atn degrees F thermistor, ±0.5 degrees F accuracy. b. Provide with integral communications jack to communicate with the zone's unitary

controller. c. Style shall be as indicated on the plans and shall be one of the following types:

1) Temperature sensor with blank tamperproof cover, no display, no local adjustment or no local override.

2) Temperature sensor with LCD display indicating space temperature and setpoint adjustment buttons or slider. Local occupancy override.

7. Immersion Temperature Sensors:

a. 10K ohm at 77 degrees F thermistor, ±0.5 degrees F accuracy. b. Range as suitable for application. c. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowell for threaded mounting into pipe. d. Thermal paste shall be used in all thermowells. e. 4 or 8 inch insertion length depending upon pipe size and mounting configuration

available (elbow, lateral Or straight).

8. Pressure Sensors:

a Air Differential Pressure Sensors

1) Electronic transducer 2) Linear variable differential transformer type sensing element with two-wire

transmitter 3) 2 % of full scale accuracy

9. Carbon Dioxide (CO,) Sensors for demand ventilation control:

a. Non-dispersive infrared (NDlR) sensor.

1339

b. Continuous monitoring. c. Microprocessor based with LCD local display and setup keypad. d. 0 to 2,200 ppm measurement range. e. Accuracy: ±75 ppm or 7 % whichever is greater. f. Repeatability: ±20 ppm. g. Altitude correction adjustable. h. Output signal: Continuous proportional analog output, 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20mA. i. Factory calibrated with 5 year guarantee. j. Calibration: Minimum recommended 3 year interval. k. Furnish necessary calibration tools and gases for the test and balance agency to spot

check the calibration and to demonstrate calibration to the Owner. 1. Room (wall) or duct mounted as indicated on control drawings. Provide duct

mounting kit with aspirating box with sampling probe and/or tubing. m. Integral temperature sensing when CO, and temperature sensing are required in the

same room. n. No display on cover. o. Temperature setpoint adjustment when indicated on the drawings.

10. Fuel/Combustion Sensors:

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA VALLEY CO:l-IMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970 - 19 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

a. Carbon monoxide (CO) for gasoline powered vehicles and Nitric Oxide (NO) for diesel powered vehicles.

b. Basis of Design: ACI c. General

1) Power: 24V 2) Outputs: BACnet and (3) SPOT form I C relays 3) Sampling: Diffusion or flow through 4) Accuracy: +1- 2% ofLEL 5) Audible rating: 80 db at 10 em, 2,700 hz with 3 programmable tones 6) Indicators: LCD graphic display 7) Operating range: -40 degree F to 158 degrees F, 5 to 95% RH non

condensing 8) NEMA enclosure for wall mounting with pump through and calibration cap

kit. 9) Internal Fusing 10)

d. Carbon Monoxide (CO) Sensors:

I) Coverage maximum 7500 square feet 2) Electro Mechanical sensor 3) Range: 0 to 250 ppm.

e. Nitrogen Dioxide Sensors:

1) Maximum coverage: 5000 square feet 2) Electro Mechanical Sensor 3) Range: 0-10 PPM

f. Furnish calibration tools and gases for field calibration of sensors and demonstration of calibration to the Owner.

J. Switches

1339

1. Air Flow Switches:

a. General purpose utilizing differential air pressure. b. SPOT snap-acting contracts. c. Adjustable from 0.1 to 2.0 inches WG minimum or as required for the intended

application. d. Aluminum construction with neoprene diaphragm.

2. Bypass Swi tches:

a. Momentary contact type push button. b. InstalIed in standard waH box with stainless steel cover.

3. Current Switches (fan and pump status):

a. Self-powered. b. Solid state.


ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 15970 • 20

c. Adjustable trip current; selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the EMCS system.

d. UL listed. e. Provide variable frequency drive rated current switches on motors with VFDs.

4. Damper End Switches:

a. Momentary type limit switches for monitoring motion of the damper at a prescribed arc of rotation.

b. Hermetically sealed mercury contacts that operate by way of a trip lever. c. Mounted on the exterior ofthe duct so that the trip lever is aligned wjth the damper

vane. d. Mechanically adjustable in the switch case to set the proper lever action for tripping

the mercury switch contacts. e. SPOT contact arrangement exceeding the load requirements for both voltage and

current.

5. Air Differential Pressure Switches:

a. Snap-acting b. Pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) c. NEMA 1 enclosure d. Scale range and differential suitable for intended application e. UL listed f. Filter Status: Range 0.05 to 2.0 inches WG, adjustable, SPDT contacts, 15 amps at

277VAC. g. Duct High Limit: Range 0.40 to 12.0 inches WG adjustable, SPST contacts, 15 amps

at 277 V AC, manual reset.

6. OnlOffSwitch:

a. Standard wall box type switch. b. Single pole. c. 1I1uminated switch with light activated when controlled device is on. d. Stainless steel cover plate. e. Timer when indicated on plans.

K. Sensor Wells

1. Bronze or brass with NPT threads sized to match associated device.

L. Transformers

I. Current Transformers:

a. Current ratio as necessary for application. b. Windings completely enclosed, except for terminals. c. 1 % offull scale accuracy. d. UL listed.

2. Voltage Transformers:

1339


a. 600 V AC rated.

ENERGY MANAGEME]',T AND CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 15970 - 21

b. Complete with built-in fuse protection. c. Windings completely enclosed, except for terminals. d. Suitable for ambient temperatures of 40 tu 130 degrees F. e. 0.5 % accuracy at 24 V AC.

M. Transmitters

1. Current Transmitters:

a. Self-powered combination split-core current transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifIer.

b, Unit range as necessary for application, c. Internal zero and span adjustment. d. I % of fun scale accuracy. e. UL listed.

2. Voltage Transmitters:

a. Self-powered single loop type. b. Internal zero and span adjustment. c. I % of full scale accuracy. d. UL listed.

N. Wiring: All wiring shall be compliant to local building codes and the NEC and Division 16 of these specifIcations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the ArchitectlEngineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment may be installed as shown. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

C. The contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work Ifhead room or space conditions appear inadequate or if any discrepancies occur between the plans and the Contractor's work and the plans and the work of others, the Contractor shall report these discrepancies to the Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate the Contractor's work with the work of others. Any changes in the work covered by this specification made necessary by the failure or neglect of the contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by this contractor at his expense.

3.2 GENERAL

A. Installation oftemperature control system and equipment shall be complete under this section.

1339

Provide all required system components and wiring necessary to accomplish the specified sequences of operation as indicated on the drawings.



1. Exception: Components specified to be factory furnished with a particular mechanical equipment item.

B. All control devices installed in ductwork shall be positively anchored and attached to the ductwork by mechanical means. Duct access panels shall be provided for all such devices.

C. It shall be the responsibility ofthis contractor to provide power for all devices requiring power. Coordinate with other trades to arrange for necessary power circuits. All control devices shall obtain power from dedicated control circuits. Provide control voltage transformers for low voltage control power.

D. Wiring as used herein shall be construed as all wiring, conduits, hangers, etc., required for successful operation of the system. All wiring shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and local and state electrical code requirements and Division 16.

E. Install equipment, piping, and wiringfraceways parallel to building lines wherever possible.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Actuators: All actuators for dampers furnished with air handling units shall be furnished under this Section 15970 and Shipped to the air handling unit manufacturer by Section 15970 contractor for factory mounting within the air handling units. Section 15970 Contractor shall coordinate with the various air handling unit manufacturers as to the size and quantity of actuators required for proper control of the dampers.

B. Airflow Measuring Station: Provide in sizes and locations shown on plans.

C. Temperature Control Dampers: Dampers furnished under this Section shall be installed under Section 15910. Coordinate with Section 15910 contractor.

D. Controllers

I. General: Controllers shall be installed in convenient locations directly on or immediately adjacent to the controlled oquipment.lf locations are not shown on the drawings, verilY location with owner's representative prior to installation.

2. Equipment Controllers: Provide a dedicated controller for each air handling unit or other HVAC system.

a. Exception: A single controller can serve multiple air handling units or systems if all points for each individual system are connected to the same system and roquired spare capacities are maintained as noted below. Points for a single system connected to multiple panels are unacceptable.

1339

b. Spare Capacity: Provide a minimum of One AIIAO/DI and DO spare point at each air handler, boiler, and chiller controller. Provide a minimum of25 % spare capacity on each communication trunk for future use.

3. Unitary Controllers

a. Unitary Controllers shall be provided as required. Unitary controllers serving mechanical equipment that is part of a larger system (e.g. air terminal unit controllers that are part of a VA V system) shall be connected to the EMCS through the equipment controller serving the associated system.


ENERGY MANAGEME1 .... r AND CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 15970 - 23

b. Air terminal unit controllers furnished under this Section shall be shipped to the air terminal unit manufacturer by the EMCS contractor for factury mounting. Controllers and terminal units shall be :factory calibrated to provide the maximum and minimum airflow values as indicated in the schedule. Final control connection, checkout, and calibration offactory-mounted controls shall be done at the site under this Section. This shall include all terminal unit controllers.

E. General Components

I. Conduit: Provide as required in the wiring section in complete accordance with the applicable version of the NEC. Conduit terminations shall be free from burrs with a strain relief fitting provided.

2. Nameplates: Provide system and component labeling in accordance with the req uirements of Section 15190. All control components except room temperature sensOrs shall be equipped with nameplates to identifY each control component. Contractor shall submit proposed labeling list prior to installation of labels.

3. Room Temperature Sensors: Mount at 4 feet 0 inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise. Sensors shall connect to the equipment serving the space the thermostat is located in. Not all thermostats are shown on the drawings and those shown are preliminary locations only. The contractor shall mark all fmal thermostat locations on-site for approval by the Owner's Representative prior to installation. Locations shall be coordinated with light switches where appropriate.

4. Sensors

a. General:

1339

I) Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates.

2) All wires attached to sensors shall be air-sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

3) Duct Temperature Sensors: Averaging type sensors installed in a serpentine manner vertically across the duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

4) Low Limit Thermostats: Installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. Locate on the inlet side of air handling unit cooling coils close the outside air damper.

5) Outside Air Temperature Sensors: Install on a north wall complete with sun shield. VerifY location with the Engineer prior to installation.

6) Pressure Sensors: The piping to the pressure ports on all pressure transducers shall contain a capped test port located adjacent to the transducer.

7) Room Temperature Sensors: Install on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.

8) Fuel/Combustion Sensors. Mount at height and spacing for room coverage as recommended by the manufacturer. Set alarm points at manufacturer recommended settings and review with campus safety officer.

5. Transmitters

a. Provide for all temperature and pressure sensing b. Serpentine transmitter and controller cap tube averaging elements in mixed air and

across coil :face to prevent possibility of sensing stratifIed air c. Provide access panels for temperature transmitters located in return/exhaust ductwork



6. Wiring

a.

b.

c. d.

e.

f.

Wiring inside control cabinets shall be dressed neatly and tied with Thomas and Betts wire ties. Plastic tooth wire ties are not acceptable. All field wiring entering control cabinets shall be labeled with Thomas and Betts selflaminating wire markers Or appropriate alphanwneric labels corresponding to tennination shown on the control drawings. Colored phase tape shall not be used. Wiring routed from equipment shall be in a manner as to avoid injury to the wiring. "Across-the hinge" wiring shall be dressed to avoid strain and abrasion. Provide spiral wrap suitable to this application. Install instrumentation grounding as necessary to preclude ground loops and noise from adversely affecting equipment operations. Wiring shall be enclosed in conduit in the following conditions:

1) All wiring in mechanical/equipment rooms. 2) Concealed wiring. 3) Outdoor wiring. 4) Wiring mounted on vibrating equipment such as fans and compressors.

(Avoid crossing flexible connections Or vibration isolation components. Where wiring leaves vibrating equipment, provide ample flexible conduit to permit nonnal machinery movement.)

5) Wiring routed above ceilings. 6) All wiring associated with smoke control system. 7) Communication wiring. S) Exception:

a) Conduit for wiring above accessible T -bar ceilings may be omitted if approved by local and state electrical code authorities.

b) Conduit for wiring in return air plenums may be omitted if approved by local and state electrical code authorities, providing that the contractor utilize plenum rated cable.

g. All wiring requirements noted above apply to communications wiring. The following requirements are intended to be supplemental to those requirements.

I) Communication wiring shall not be installed in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1 or other Class 2 wiring.

2) Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for cable installation as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during installation.

3) Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable.

4) Provide a lightning arrestor between the lines and ground wherever a cable enters Or exits a building.

5) Communication wiring shall be installed in continuous lengths. Spliced wires are not acceptable.

6) Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC Regulations Article on Communications Circnits, Cable and Protector Grounding.

7. Fiber Optic Cabling

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15970 - 25 STATE PROJEcr NO. 2014-226

a. Maximum pulling tensions as specified by the cable manufacturer shaH not be exceeded during installation. Post-installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacturer's specifications.

b. AU cabling and associated components shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum cable unjacketed ftber bend radii as specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.

3.4 START-UP, CALIBRATION, TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Start-up and check-out

I. Verify that all circuits, controls and devices are properly installed. 2. Check connectivity of all control points between field devices and controllers. Check and

confirm all device addresses and control points. 3. VerifY that all dampers and control valves operate in the correct direction. 4. Energize the controlled equipment and test for proper operation. Make all necessary

adjustments, remove and replace any malfunctioning devices and retest.

B. Calibration and Adjusting

I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C. Testing

1.

2.

3.

Calibrate all sensors and devices. Submit calibration sheets to the Owner's Representative. Make 3-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog device. Calibrate devices according to manufacturer's directions. Adjust flow, pressure and temperature switches. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers. Adjust all initial temperature setpoints.

The completed control system shall be adjusted and tested under operating conditions by a qualified technician in the employ of the EMCS Contractor. Before commencing the testing, the technician shall prepare an Owner approved, itemized log for the full range of control functions for each system. The log shall be initialed by the test engineer as each test is performed. When the testing is completed, the test log and a letter of certification stating that all control functions ofthe system have been checked and are in satisfactory operating order and in compliance with the contract documents shall be given to the Owner.

D. Demonstration

I. The complete and fully operational control system shall demonstrated to the designated Ov.'Jler's personnel and project engineer upon completion of successful start-up and testing. Demonstration shall be an overview of the entire functionality of the system including the operator's terminal, the web browser interface, the graphical user interface, remote control point adjustment, scheduling procedures, overrides, alarms, unitary and terminal unit control.

2. Demonstration of the system shall occur in order to verifY overall compliance with the above start-up and testing.

3. Demonstration shall be prior to, and in addition to, the required operator training.

1339



3.5 SERVICE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING

A. Perform the regularlY scheduled maintenance service visits as required by Part 1 of these specifications.

B. Provide warranty service and system troubleshooting as needed during the project warranty period.

3.6 SYSTEM SCHEDULING

A. During initial set-up and programming oflhe control system, the EMCS Contractor shall work closely with the Owner's staifto develop and program equipment utilization schedules.

1. Equipment utilization schedules shall allow the Owner to operate groups of equipment in occupied mode based on the use of the building through selection of the appropriate utilization schedule at the Operator's workstation. Any piece of equipment shall have the capability of belonging to more than one utilization schedule.

2. The type and expected duration of the building activities shall dictate which mechanical systems and HV AC equipment must be operational, as well as the appropriate occupied setpoints.

3.7 96-HOUR TEST RUN

A. The 96-hour test run shall be made when all field equipment is installed and the system is calibrated and running, and When all other building systems (including drywall, windows, doors, etc.) are complete. This period is intended to demonstrate the operation of the complete building.

B. The 96-hour test run shall include performance of all associated software and hardware operations called for in these specifications. The test shall be for a duration of96 continuous hours with no Contractor maintenance required. The pre-balance conference shall not be scheduled until this test has been completed satisfactorily (I.e. run without errors or alarms fur a continuous 96-hollT period). Notify Owner's Representative prior to beginning the 96-hour run test.

3.8 CARBON DIOXIDE MONITORING

A. This Section applies to the Operations Building on systems that have C02 sensing.

B. Provide a permanent C02 monitoring system that provides feedback to the building operators to make adjustments to the air handling system ventilation rates if the space C02 levels fall outside of acceptable levels. Consult contml drawings for C02 sensor requirements.

C. The maximum acceptable C02 differential in PPM (differential between space C02 and ambient C02) for each occupied group occupancy space has been calculated as:

1. ConferencefMeetingiStudent Study

a. Assumed Outdoor Levels: 400 ppm b. Target C02 differential: 910 ppm c. Target Concentrations (75% oftarget differential plus ambient): 1085 ppm d. Assumed steady State Concentration: 1310 ppm e. Alarm Concentration: 1440 ppm

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIOl'iS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUl'iITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226


D. For all occupied hours oflhe building, the energy management system shall trend the ambient C02 levels, the space C02 levels and the actual C02 differential. The trending shall compare the actual differentials to the acceptable differentials calculated by the engineer.

E. The EMCS shall monitor all C02 sensors in a discriminator fashion. The system will modulate the outside air based on the space with highest measured C02 diffurential. The system shall modulate the outside air between its minimum scheduled base ventilation rate and the minimum ventilation rate upper limit in a linear fashion between 50% of the target C02 differential and 75% ofthe maximum target C02 differential. Between 75% and 100% of the target differential, the outside air dampers shall open to the minimum ventilation rate upper Jimit. The minimum ventilation rate upper limit is calculated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62and scheduled on the drawings.

I. Economizer cooling, when required, will over-ride minimum outside air controls and increase outside air to provide "free cooling."

2. Demand for additional outside air (make-up for exhaust) shall over-ride the minimum outside air controls and increase the outside air to provide make-up for the building exhaust.

3. Should the C02 differential exceed the calculated differential, an alarm shall be reported to the Energy Management Control System so that the facility operators can adjust the upper limit of the minimum outside air setting.

3.9 BUILDING FLUSHOUT

A. 'Ibis section applies to the operations building

B. Refer to Section 15005 for supplemental information.

C. During flush out the Building Automation Contractor shall set-up systems to ensure that:

I. Supply fans (and return fans where applicable) shall operate continuously, 24 hours a day for the duration of the flush cycle.

2. Calculate flush cycle duration (time). The flush cycle shall deliver 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area. Note that the minimum outside air systems will require extended flush cycles. Submit calculations for cycle duration by system to the Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and General Contractor within 30 days of project notice to proceed so that the General contractor can make provisions for cleaning and flushing in the construction schedule.

3. Control the systems to maintain a minimum space temperature of 60 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum RH of 60%

4. Trend and totalize the volume of outside air delivered to the space for each system during the clean/flush cycle.

PART 4 SEOUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.1 SEE CONTROL DIAGRAMS ON DRAWINGS FOR REQUffiED SEQUENCE OF OPERATION.


1339


PART 1 GENERAL


VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 15971 - 1

A. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) for Division 15 work. Variable Frequency Drives to be furnished by Section 15970 in accordance with this Section.




C. Section 15170 - Motors


E. Division 16

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 15000 and Section 150\0.

B. Submit statement guaranteeing compatibility of submitted motors with submitted variable frequency drives. Coordinate with the motor manufacturer to guarantee that the motor supplied are "Inverter Duty" class motors and will operate properly with the submitted variable frequency drives without objectionable motor noise, heat, or loss of efficiency.

C. Submit product manuals and drawings which include wiring diagrams, dimensions, front view and catalog information indicating complete electrical and mechanical characteristics.

D. Submit an application specific programming plan showing the parameters and options selected for each drive.

E. Submit qualifications of agent who will perfonn start-up and testing.

F. Submit a recommended spare parts list.

G. Submit a troubleshooting, repair and maintenance manual.

H. Submit calculations showing the efmct of the variable frequency drives on the building system.

I. Submit service manuals including interboard wiring, detailed troubleshooting procedures, and spare parts list and suppliers.



1339


1.5 REGULATIONS


A. The drive shall be built to applicable NEMA standards for use as a component to meet NEC requirements.

B. Drive is to be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories CULl.

C. IEEE 519: Total harmonic distortion, 5 % maximum (Complying with IEEE 519, without external isolation tmnsformers, line reactors or filters)

D. IEEE 587: Surge Protection

E. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J: EM! and RFI radiation

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

1.6 QUAIJTY ASSURANCE

A. All drives shall be burned-in for a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours, cycling load to simulate no Ioad/fullioad and exercise drive power requirements.

B. The complete drive shall be functionally tested with a motor before shipment to assure proper operation per specification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONSTRUCTION:

A. The drive shall be designed to provide ease of maintenance and shall be modularly constructed. Printed circuit boards shall have plug-in connections and be easily removed from the drive. Power components shall be readily accessible and have "fast-on" or screw terminal connections for easy removal.

J. Unless otherwise specified, the drive shall be a NEMA Type I enclosure. 2. The drive shall consist of the following major components:

a. Input rectifier section to supply fixed DC bus voltage b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to.ground MOV protection c. Smoothing reactor for the DC bus d. DC bus capacitors e. Sine weighted pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter section consisting of Insulated

Gate Bipolar Transistors (lGBT's) f. Separate terminal blocks for control and power wiring g. Input line reactors h. Integral motor rated circuit and breaker disconnect and handle operation i. 5 % input line impedance.

3. The following devices shall be operable with the enclosure door closed:

a. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch b. Run/Stop Indication c. Manual speed control

[339


d. Digital display and keyboard

V ARlABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 15971 - 3

e. Resetting oflhe external overcurrent protective device

4. Enclosure and components shall have a minimum short circuit interrupting rating of 14,000 amps. Short circuit and overcurrent protective devices shall be selected to coordinate with other in-Hne devices according to Division 16. Digital display panel and keyboard for programming, operation, and fault codes diagnostic information shall be provided. No adjustments by potentiometers other than manual speed control is acceptable. All drive set-up operations and adjustments shall be digital and stored in a nonvolatile memory (EEPROM).

B. Operating Conditions

1. The drive shall be suitable for use in normal indoor non-hazardous environments subject to the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient1emperature range of 0 to 40 "C b. Humidity range from 5 to 95 %, non-condensing c. Fan-assisted cooling shall be used where required to dissipate heat. The fan shall be

installed in such a manner as not to degrade the enclosure rating.

C. Input Power

1. Unless otherwise specified, the drive shall accept 460V AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz. 2. Accept input line voltages of 400 to 500V AC ± 10 % and line frequency of 48 to 63 Hz. 3. Drive shall be equipped with an automatic extended Power Loss Rlde-through circuit which

will utilize the inertia of the load to keep the drive powered. Minimum Power Loss Rlde Through shall be one cycle based on full load and no inertia.

4. The drive input circuitry shall not generate line notches or large voltage transients on the incoming line. Provide protection through EMIIRFI filters.

5. The drive shall present a displacement power factor of 0.95 or belter to the AC line at any speed or load.

6. The drive control efficiency at rated load and frequency shall be 98 % or better to the AC line at any sped or load.

7. The drive shall have input transient protection and shall not be sensitive to notching on the incoming line.

8. Shall be capable of automatic restart after overvoltage, overcurrent, undervoltage, or loss of input signal trip. Number of restarJ attempts and timing shall be programmable.

D. Output Power

I. The drive shall produce a (sine weighted PWM) three phase output for the load. 2. Unless otherwise specified, the standard drive output frequency shall be adjustable from 0 to

120 % of base speed. 3. Unless otherwise specifIed, the drive output voltage shall be adjustable from 0 to 460 VAC,

reaching 460 V at 60 Hz. 4. Variable torque drives shall produce a reduced volts-per-hertz (VIHz) ratio in the 60 Hz range

and below. 5. Constant torque drives shall produce a constant volts-per-hertz (V/Hz) ratio in the 60 Hz

range and below.

1339

6. Unless otherwise specified, the driVe shall supply a constant 460 V output when operating above 60 Hz.


VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 15971- 4

7. The volts-per-hertz output of the drive shall not be affected or require readjustment when other drive adjustments (such as maximum speed) are changed.

8. Selectable constant VlHz ratio or configurative VlHz ratio. The drive shall have selectable pre-programmed VlHz ratios and the capability of programming a custom VlHz pattern.

9. As standard, the drive will have the ability to produce a linear or squared VlHz curve. 10. When subject to the range of ambient conditions stated above, the drive shall be capable of

maintaining 110 % of rated output current continuously. 11. When subject to the range of ambient conditions stated above, the drives shall be capable of

delivering for up to one minute, the following:

a. 1 J 0 % of rated output current for variable torque drives. b. 150 % of rated output current for constant torque drives.

12. The drive shall have field adjustable PWM carrier frequency to minimize audible motor noise. The carrier frequency shall be adjustable from approximately I KHz to at least 3 KHz.

13. The drive shall be capable of operating the output open circuited with no fault or damage. 14. The drive shall be capable of delivering ISO % starting torque in starting torque application

and 110 % in variable torque applications.

E. Control Features:

1. Hand·Off-Auto selector switch functions for drive applications:

a. Hand selected: the speed is controlled from the local operator control panel. The remote 0 to IOVDC signal shall be isolated and have no control in this position.

b. Off selected: the drive cannot be started. c. Auto selected: the drive shall be started and stopped via a remote dry contact (24

VDC or less). The speed shall be in proportion to a remote 0 to 10 VDC control signal.

2. Unless otherwise specified, the drive shall produce an output frequency proportional to the speed reference without external feedback.

3. For all analog speed commands, the drive shall maintain set frequency to within 0.01 Hz during power line fluctuations or changes in ambient temperatures.

4. Within the drive rating, the drive shall maintain set frequency and not require readjustment due to changes in load.

5. The drive shall have a foldback current limiting circuit. During acceleration, the circuit shall automatically reduce the acceleration rate to a slower rate should the load inertia cause excessive currents.

1339

6. The drive shall have a selectable deceleration voltage limiting circuit. The circuit shall extend the set deceleration ramp should the bus voltage approach high limits due to regeneration.

7. The drive sball have incrementally adjustable lR compensation boost. A selectable range for offsetting motor losses at low frequency operation shall be used to optimize motor torque for starting high inertia and high friction loads.

8. Drive operation shall be fully digital with microprocessor control of frequency. voltage and current.

9. The drive shall be capable of starting with the load regenerating voltage back on the drive bus.

10. The controls (including hand-off-auto) shall have the capability of being overridden by the opening of a normally closed dry contact, supplied and operated by the building fire alarm system.



F. Speed Control

I. The drive shall contain an independent parameter which will provide an adjustable minimum speed setting from 0 to 70 Hz.

2. The drive shall contain an independent parameter which will provide an adjustable maximum speed setting from 40 to 70 Hz.

3. The drive shall accept an analog input reference of 0 to 10 VDC, or from a potentiometer. The 0 to 10 VDC option shall be the standard reference unless othelWise indicated.

4. The drive shall provide a "percentage of load" analog output signal (e.g. 0 to 10 VDC) for remote monitoring. Output shall be compatible with Division 15 requirements.

5. Selectable coast or controlled ramp stop or DC braking. Selectable stopping modes of coast, ramp to stop or DC brake to stop shall be available.

6. Three adjustable skip frequencies shall be provided to minimize equipment resonances.

G. Drive Controls

1. The drive start/stop commands shall have the capability of operating from TTL, 24 VDC, 115 V AC optional interface boards. The 24 VDC option shall be the standard unless otherwise indicated.

2. The drive shall accept contact closure (2-wire control) or separate start and stop push buttons (3-wire control).

3. The drive inverter shall have capability to be enabled without the need for a start signal, after initial drive power-up.

4. The drive shall have selectable auto restart after a power loss or other pre-selected fault condition. When applied to a spinning motor, the drive shall synchronize to the motor's speed and smoothly accelerate the motor back to the setpoint speed without resetting, recycling or re-enabling the controls. Four (4) retry attempts shall not invalidate the manufacturer's warranty.

5. Intemallockout of panel controls shall be provided to prevent the changing of system parameters. Viewing capability shall not be affected.

6. Drive shall accept a normally closed dry contact signal from an external source, which, when opened will stop the drive in hand or auto.

H. Protection

1. Protection is defined as the normal shutdown without any drive, motor or eqUipment damage. 2. The drive shall be capable of monitoring, annunciating and shutting down the drive for the

following conditions:

a. MOPC

1) The drive shall have an adjustable momentary overload protection circuit (MOPC) adjustable from 50 to 115 % of drive rating for variable torque drives and from 50 to 150 % of drive rating for constant torque drives.

b. Motor Overload Protection

1339

I) The drive shall provide programmable electronic motor overload protection in compliance with the NEC and tested in accordance with UL Standard 991.

2) The overload protection shall be adjustable from 50 to 110 % of the drive full load current rating.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 15971 - 6 Y AKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE

STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

c. Overvoltage/Undervoltage Protection

I} Outside±IO % of rated input voltage

d. Phase Protection

I} The drive shall have protection against (and indicate), a phase-to-phase short in the output load, Or a short circuit in a phase of the output module.

e. Heat Sink Temperature

I} The drive shall monitor the temperature of the heat sink. If the heat sink temperature exceeds approximately 212 OF the drive shall shut down and annunciate the condition on the digital display panel.

f. Ground Fault Detection g. Bus Charged Indication

I} When power is applied to the drive and hazardous potentials exist on the DC bus, the drive shall provide a visual indication at the front of the drive. These indications shall remain lit until power is removed from the drive and the DC bus discharges to potential of 40 VDC or less.

h. Bus Discharge Protection

I} The drive shall contain circuits that will discharge the DC bus to below 40 VDC within 60 seconds after input power is removed from the drive. (Note: 40 V is the current NFPA standard).

i. Input fusing

I} The drive shall have input line fuses as a standard feature in the drive enclosures.

1. Drive Diagnostics

I. The drive shall execute, on initial power-up, a self diagnostic check. The integral programming display panel shall provide first fault indication of the drive protection functions. Fault indication shall be retained if input power is lost. Fault codes shall provide direction as to board level and input/output level to aid in trouble shooting.

J. Serial Communications

1. Provide capability to Interface with the EMCS System in Section 15970 BacNet Protocol 2. Provide with (2) programmable analog outputs, (3) programmable relay outputs.

2.2 PRODUCTS


1. ABB, ACH550

B. Service:

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STt\ Tf: PROJf:CT NO. 2014-226


1. Manufacturer shall maintain a service center or service representative within 150 miles of the job site. This center must normally provide the following services:

a Factory coordinated start-up service. b. Perform service calls and providing replacement parts within twenty-four (24) hours c. Provide service contracts. d. Training of customers in operation and basic troubleshooting. e. Maintaining a stock of frequently replaceable parts at a local warehouse.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXECUTION

A. Sizing:

1. The drives shall be sized as required by the scheduled motors. See Division 15 and the Mechanical Drawing Schedules for motor information. The drive shall be sized for the specified motor size plus a 10 % service factor.

2. The drives shall be sized to continualIy operate the motors at 110 % of full load current or greater.

3. Either a variable Or constant torque drive shall be selected based on the application and shall be provided as specified for each application.

B. Installation and Field Wiring:

1. Mounting and power wiring and power terminations shall be provided by Division 16. 2. Control wiring and control terminations shall be provided by Section 15970.

C. Field Start Up and Testing

1. The start up and testing is to be provided at the installation site by the manufacturer or other agent deemed acceptable by the Owner's Representative.

2. VerifY all installation connections and controls. 3. Field adjust all safety controls. 4. Field adjust all drive parameters (including acceleration and deceleration ramps and volts-to

hertz ratio for smooth operation). 5. All mechanical components shall be adjusted for proper alignment. 6. Demonstrate satisfactory operation of drive including line reactors, filters, and the bypass

contactor under full load rpm. 7. Submit start-up and test report in accordance with Section 15010.

D. Training

1339

1. Provide on-site operation and maintenance training by manufucturer or other agent deemed acceptable by the Owner's Representative for two (2) identical four (4) hour sessions. Coordinate training times with the Owner's Representative.

2. At the sessions, include troubleshooting, repair, and maintenance manuals for six (6) maintenance personnel. This is in addition to copies furnished in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.


CAMPUS OPERATIOr.'S CO:\IPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

PART 1 GENERAL


TESTING, ADJUSTIr.'G, AND BALAr.'CING SECTION 15990 - 1

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of environmental systems including but not limited to air distribution, miscellaneous systems, and the equipment and apparatus connected thereto.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The Owner will issue a separate contract for the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) of the Mechanical Systems as specified herein. TAB will be completed as specified herein. The Contractor shall omit the TAB as specified in this section from the bid but shall include any required interfaces with this Agency as specified in Section 15010. The TAB contractor shall provide the services indicated in this section.






1.4 REFERENCES

A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance

B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers

C. ASHRAE III - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems

D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems

E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting. and Balancing

1.5 FIELD REPORTS (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Submit when deficiencies in systems prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. Indicate deficiencies in the report.

B. Submit report prior to preparation of balancing report.

1.6 DATA SHEETS

A. Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms or NEBB forms or an exact reproduction thereof.

B. Data sheets shall, at a minimum, indicate design and actual conditions for all information included in the equipment schedules on the drawings.

1339

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STA1'E PROJEC1' NO. 2014·226

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 ·2

1.7 PRELIMINARY AND FINAL BALANCE REPORTS

A. Submit two (2) draft copies of preliminary balance report fur review prior to final acceptance of Project for review.

B. Make required corrections to the TAB report and provide three (3) final copies of the balance report, one (1) for Architect/Engineer, and two (2) for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

C. Provide Architect/Engineer's final report in soft cover, letter size, securely bound manuals, complete witb index page, indexing tabs, and cover identification. Reports for inclusion in the operating and maintenance manuals shall meet the same requirements, except binding shall be coordinated witb the operation and maintenance manuals.

1.8 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT (REFER TO SECTION 15010)

A. Provide final balance reports for inclusion in tbe operation and maintenance manuals as described above.


A. Perform total system and equipment balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, BalanCing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

1.10 PRE·BALANCING CONFERENCE

A. Convene at project site one (I) week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 15010.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. See Section 15010 for required interface between the shectmetal, plumbing, and control contractor, and balance agency.

1.12 ACCEPTABLE TOLERANCES

A. All systems and equipment shall be adjusted to witbin plus or minus 10 % of design conditions.

PART 2 (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINA nON

A. VerifY that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure that the items on the pre· balance checklist are completed.

B. Submit field reports as required to report defecls and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance.

1339


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 . 3

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing. adjusting, and balancing operations.

3.3 PROCEDURES

A. All procedures shall be in accordance with and meet all the requirements of either AABC or NEBB procedural standards. The requirements listed in this section are intended to be supplementary to the requirements of these standards.

B. Supplemental Req uirements

I. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. 2. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings

to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. 3. After adjustment, take measurements to verifY balance has not been disrupted or that such

disruption has been rectified. 4. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing

doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 5. At project closeout, Balancing Agency shall be represented at final observation meeting by

qualified testing personnel with balancing equipment and two (2) copies of air balancing test report.

a. Owner's Representative may choose and direct spot balancing of one zone. Differences of 10 % or more between the spot balance and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and balancing for entire building.

b. Re-balancing shall be done in presence of Owner's Representative or Engineer and subject to their approval.

c. Spot balance and re-balance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. The Contractor shall compensate the Owner's Representative for additional time and expense incurred.

3.4 Am SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide design supply, return, outside air, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

B. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment offan speeds. Calculate drive changes and coordinate with the Sheet Metal contractor for changeout. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

1339


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 . 4

O. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. In cooperation of Section 23 09 23, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers as specified, indicated or noted.

H. Adjust outside air dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

r. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

J. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches w.g. positive static pressure near the building entries.

L. Where air handling equipment supplied to the job provides up to 10% more or less air than design requirements, rooms supplied by tbat unit will require more precise balance so that the outlets/inlets are within the previously indicated +1-10% of design.

M. Maintain differentials betwcen supply and return or exhaust quantities so that space pressurization is maintained.

3.5 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM

A. Check, adjust and record flow rate at recire pumps and branch circuit setters to the flow rates On the drawings.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

1. Domestic Water Recirculation Pumps and system 2. Terminal Heat Transfer Units 3. Fan Coils 4. Packaged Rooftop Units 5. Fans 6. Make-up Air Units 7. Air Inlets and Outlets 8. Split Systems 9. Variable Frequency Drives

B. Report Forms

I. Title Page:

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

1339

Name of Testing, Adjusting, and BalanCing Agency Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Project name Project location Project Architect Project Engineer


h. Proj eel Contractor i. Project altitude j. Report date

2. Summary Comments:

a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 5

e, Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization. e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions

3. Instrument List:

a Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date

4. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer b. ModeVFrame c. HP/BHP d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements

1339

h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

5. Air Moving Equipment

a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. ArrangementlCiass/Discharge f. Supply air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual i. Total static pressure (IOtal external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure Ie. Discharge pressure L Sheave Make/Size/Bore In, Number of BeltslMakelSize n, Fan RPM 0, On systems with supply and return or exhaust fans record offset volumes used for

system pressurization, On variable volume systems, forward offset volumes to the EMCS contractor for input into their programming for return fan tracking.

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKI~IA VALLEY COM~mNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014·226

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 • 6

p. On AH and HR systems record heat exchanger and filter air pressure drops.

6. Exhaust Fan Data:

a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i. Sheave Make/SizelBore j. Number of BellslMake/Size k. Fan/RPM I. For exhaust fans that exhaust to the outdoors and switch on/off during occupied

mode, forward final balanced air volumes to the BIvles contractor for input into their programming for return fan tracking.

7. Duct Traverse:

a. System zonelbranch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow

8. Air Flow Measuring Station:

a. Identification/number b. Location c. Size d. Manufacturer e. Model number f. Serial number g. Design flow rate h. Design pressure drop i. Actual/final pressure drop j. Actual/final flow rate k. Station calibrated setting

9. Air Distribution Test Sheet:

a. Room number/location b. Air inlet/outlet type c. Air inlet/outlet size d. Area factor e. Design velocity f. Design air flow g. Test (final) velocity

1339

CAMPL'S OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 • 7

1339

h. Test (final) air flow i. Percent of design air flow j. For rooms with exhaust, identify:

I) Design offset cfm 2) Actual offset cfm

10. Domestic Hot Water Recirculating Systems

a. See pump data previously specified. b. Circuit setter location, type, size, mfr c. Circuit setter location d. Design flow rate e. Actual flow rate

11. Variable Frequency Drives

a. Mfr, size, amp rating, heaterlfuse settings b. Control pressure c. Critical zones (top 3 driving the control pressure setpoint) d. VFD speed (hz) and amps at maximum design conditions e. VFD speed (hz) and amps at minimum design conditions

12. Other: Review control sequences on drawings for other unique aspects to system set up required by the test and balance agency.


CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING SUPPORT YAKIMA V ALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE SECTION 15996 - 1 STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Commissioning Agency: The CA has been contracted directly with the owner for this project. The CA has overall responsibility for planning and coordinating the commissioning process. However commissioning involves all parties to the design and construction process, including the mechanical (Division 15) contractor, and all specialty sub-contractor within Division 15, such as sheet metal, piping, refrigeration, water treatroent, and controls, plus major equipment suppliers as required.

B. Contractor Responsibility: The mechanical (Division 15) contractor's responsibilities are defined in Section 01810 of the specifications. These responsibilities apply to all specialty sub-contractors and major equipment suppliers within Division 15. Each contractor and supplier shall review Section 01810, and their bids shall include for carrying out the work described, as it applies to each Section within the Division 15 specifications, individually and collectively.

C. Include allowance in the bid to support commissioning in Sections 01810. Allowance shall be a separate line item on the schedule of values .

D. Include time for commissioning activities on the constructlon schedule to complete commissioning prior to substantial completion with the exception of seasonal testing which the commissioning agent determines should coincide with peak heating and cooling weather conditlons.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 15

1. Division 15 - All Sections

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS ELSEWHERE

A. The following sections detail the specific commissioning requirements:

PART 2 (NOT USED)

PART 3 (NOT USED)

E)\,'D OF SECTION 15996

J339


PART 1 - GENERAL

GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16000 -1

3 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections of the Contract, 6 apply to the work of this section.

SUMMARY: 9

This section of the Specification covers the administrative and general provisions for the electrical work.

12 SUMMARY OF WORK:

15

1B

21

24

27

30

33

36

39

42

Provide a complete electrical system including the following:

New 208/120 volt. 3 phase, 4 wire, electrical services in conjunction with Pacific Power, including utility revenue metering, and service panel.

Circuit breaker type lighting and appliance panelboards, for power, lighting and general branch circuits.

Lighting fixtures, lamps and lighting controls.

Motor starters - individually enclosed.

Disconnects and safety switches.

Receptacles (convenience outlets).

Raceway systems including conduit, fittings, boxes, hangers, connectors, couplings, and other accessories.

Wire, cable, cord and other electrical conductors insulated and bare for the circuits including service, feeder and branch circuits, grounding, signal and control circuits, etc.

Door Access System for the Office Building.

The extent of the work under this DIVISION includes:

Testing andlor start-up of equipment, systems, circuits, and devices as herein specified and as necessary to place the project into operation.

Connecting to the power source the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment and motors furnished and installed under other Divisions of the Specifications. Control of the

45 heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment and motors shall be provided as specified under other Divisions of the Specifications except for the wiring of controls shown on the electrical Drawings or listed in this Division of the Specifications. The materials and workmanship

4B of all electrical work shall be as specified under this Division.

Shop Drawings: Provide shop draWings for lighting fixtures, ballasts, motor starters, disconnect switches, 51 panelboards, lighting controls and door access system.

1339

3

•

15


Operating and Maintenance Manuals:

GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16000 - 2

The manuals shall be supplied to the Engineer for review and approval in the quantities indicated In Division 1 before any electrical eqUipment Is shipped to the job site. Construction record drawings of the work shall be provided upon completion of the work and shall be folded and punched for insertion into the manual after they are reViewed by the Engineer.

Manuals for the electrical system shall be enclosed in 3-post, expandable metal hinge binders labeled with the job name and the Contractor's name with tab dividers for each major type of equipment.

Provide manufacturer's installation, operation, maintenance, and service information, shop drawings, and testing records, for each equipment item or signal/communication system fumlshed under the electrical work. Assemble and index each section listing the contents individually on the tab divider for that section. Compile a spare parts list and a suppliers Index for each section and assemble in the section provided. Assemble records of all tests, measurements, and calibration settings made for each device.

Arc Flash Study: Complete a study and prepare a report summarizing the arc flash study and conclusions or recommendations which may affect the Integrity of the electric power distribution system for both

21 buildings. Study shall be based on the actual distribution equipment proVided by the Contractor.

Create report for new electrical distribution equipment and submit reports of eqUipment submittals 24 for approval. Distribution equipment shall include panel boards etc.

The arc flash study shall be stamped and signed by an electrical engineer registered In the State 27 of Washington.

Determine the incident energy, arc flash boundary, and minimum PPE requirements for locations 30 throughout the portions of the power system. Arc flash warning labels are to be produced and

attached to the electrical equipment. These labels must indicate approach boundaries, Incident energy level, and the minimum PPE that is required when servicing the equipment within the arc flash boundary.

As a minimum, include the following in the report: " 0 Assumptions made during the study.

o Reduced copy of the one line drawing. o Arc flash evaluations summary spreadsheet

,. 0 Bus name. o Upstream protective device name, type, settings. o Bus line to line voltage.

42 0 Bus bolted fault. o Protective device bolted fault current. o Arcing fault current.

45 0 Protective device trip/delay time. o Breaker opening time. o Solidly grounded column. o Equipment type. o Gap. o Arc flash boundary.

51 0 Working distance.

1339

3


• Incident energy. • Required proteotive fire rated clothing type and class.

GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16000 - 3

Arc flash warning labels printed in color on adhesive backed labels. Provide the arc flash warning labels containing information required by NFPA 70E and affix warning labels to each piece of electrical

6 equipment evaluated in the Arc Flash Study.

Work shall be in strict accordance with the National Electrical Code and other pertinent codes In force in 9 the State of Washington and the local area of the work.

15

Secure and pay for permits and certificates as required for electrical work,

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Except as otherwise Indicated, provide new materials and equipment which are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment, Material or equipment shall be

18 approved and labeled for the purpose for which it is to be used by a nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory such as UL, ETL, FM or other organization acceptable to the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries. Assemblies of equipment shall be approved as an assembly in addition to

21 approval of individual components, Similar items 01 equipment shall be of the same manufacture and quality. Where systems are specified, components 01 the system shall be standard items of one manufacturer.

24

Where voltage, ourrent, power, temperature or other ratings are specified that do not correspond to standard ratings of the manufaoturer selected by the Contractor, the Contraotor shall furnish the next

27 rating level whioh increases the capacity of the device or material In question,

Materials. devices, equipment or supplies furnished by this Contractor shall be of materials that are '0 Inherently non-corrosive or are coated or covered in a manner, acceptable to the Engineer, whioh renders

them non-corrosive. They shail not contain polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos or other hazardous or detrimental materials. The materials furnished by the Contraotor shall not be installed in a manner,

33 location or construction that produces galvanic action or any other materials corroding or eroding action.

Fabricate equipment or devices in the field equivalent In every respect to manufactured items used for the 36 same purpose, Where cutting, drilling, grinding, or other field fabrication, is done to galvanized or painted

metal, it shall be regalvanized or painted respectively to match original finish,

,9 Where the Contractor has proposed changes in the work, or substitutions in material, he shall be responsible for ensuring that sizes, weights, openings, and arrangements are provided that do not require changes in the work outside his contract.

42

PART 3 - EXECUTION

45 The general arrangement of panelboards. outlets and other equipment or devices as shown on the Drawings Is diagrammatic and approximate as to locations. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate location of outlets, switches, and similar devices with respect to eqUipment, doors. partitions.

•• cabinets and the finished work of others. Verify dimensions and locations with the Architectural Drawings and trades. The Contractor shall specifically check each electrical device box location with the architectural interior elevation drawings for conflicts prior to rough In, Where minor changes in location of

51 devices or equipment are required because of structural conditions or for the convenience of the Owner, such changes shall be made by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.

1339


GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16000 ·4

Coordinate work under this DIVISION with work under other Contracts, and cooperate in locating equipment to avoid interference with work of others, and plan this work to harmonize with the work of

, other trades so that all work may proceed as expeditiously as possible. Coordinate the Installing of built-in work, attaching items to buildings and cutting and patching, No extras will be allowed because of moving work required to avoid Interference with work of other Contractors .

• Coordinate the location of switches, motors, penel connections and other points of connection with the equipment manufacturers or vendors prior to conduit installation, and route circuits to the actual

9 oonnection pOint. Remove and reinstall oonduit, outlet boxes and other electrical connections, even ij removal and reinstallation of building materials is necessary, where electrioal connections are not made to the appropriate equipment location,

12

Maintain and annotate on the job at all times a separate set of Record Drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Deviations from the Drawings, stubouts, changes from the original work, routing of

15 hidden raceways, actual fixture and equipment locations, equipment sizes and dimensions and building outline changes shall be shown on the Drawings in a manner equivalent to that of the original Drawings.

,. Testing

Test electrical equipment before it is energized and placed in service, Testing shall be performed 21 by the Contractor in the presence of the Owners representative.

Thirty days prior to testing, submit to the engineer a Test Plan and detailed Test Procedures, for 24 review and approval. All testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and

testing instructions and the applicable electrical standards (i,e., NEMA, IEEE, ISA, ANSI, or other) for the class of eqUipment In the absence of a manufacturer's standard use NETA standards:

27

3.

36

45

51

1339

The Test Plan shall outline the tests planned for each item of equipment. The Test Procedures shall identijy the test equipment to be utilized, the action of each test step and the expected result so that a test technician who has no knowledge of the details of the equipment design shall be able to successfully conduct the test.

Test the resistance of the grounding electrodes in the presence of the Owner's representative. The measurement shall be done with a ground ohmmeter or the IEEE Standard No, 550, Paragraph 3.42 method. Testing shall be performed during normal dry weather conditions with at least five non-rain days elapsing prior to the test. Measured resistance of the electrode exceeding 3 ohms shall require supplemental electrode addnions until electrode resistance is less than 3 ohms.

Test the equipment and electrioal circuns for proper connection, continuity, and absence of undesirable shorts and grounds. Test wire and oable instsllation, when complete and seventy-two hours prior to energization of the system. Check for continuity, visual damage, marking, and proper phase sequence before performing insulation testing. Megger bus work, switches, breakers and circutts phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground disconnecting and reconnecting equipment which cannot be meggered as reqUired. The minimum acceptable steady-state value is 50 megohms.

Test operation, calibration, and settings of the meters, relays and Indicating devices.

Test all operating controls for proper operation.


GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16000 • 5

Test all auxiliary equipment, i.e., heaters, thermostats, lights, and all illuminated indicating devices and lamps, and all audible alarm devices which are an integral part of motor control centers,

3 transformers and panels to verify that they function properly.

Check fuses with an ohmmeter; Ring out wiring and busing; Check operation of control and safety • interlocks; Check grounding of potential transformers, current transformers, lightning arresters,

and surge capacitors; Check control connections at terminal blocks, relays, meters, switches, etc.

9 Report all test results in writing. Where tests disclose problem areas, retest after the defeot has been correoted.

12 Provide assistanoe to the Engineer during the demonstration or observation of equipment by operating devioes and equipment, opening enolosures for inspection, ohecking record drawing information, and similar tasks, as necessary, in the Engineer's judgment to verify all work provided.

15

Demonstrate to the Owner that the electrical installation is working by operating all electrical systems and equipment. Simulate control and emergency conditions, artificially where necessary, for complete system

,. tests.

Any rework or repair of equipment required during or as a result of the testing shall be done by the 21 Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner.

24 END OF SECTION 16000

1339


PART 1 • GENERAL

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 16100·1



• SUMMARY:

This section of the Specification applies to the materials and methods of the electrical work that are common to the electrical work including electrical power, lighting, communications and signal systems.

12 The materials include raceways, conductors, hangers, supports and anchors, boxes and fittings, enclosures, and protective devices.

15

PART 2 • PRODUCTS

" RacewaYs shall be one of the following types:

Rigid steel conduit - with threaded ends, hot dipped galvanized or sheradized finish. IMC or 21 aluminum is not allowed. Couplings shall be unsplit, NPT threaded steel cylinders with galvanizing

equal to the conduit. Nipples shall be factory made through eight inches in length. Running threads will not be allowed.

24

27

30

42

45

48

51

Electrical metallic tubing - galvanized steel. Couplings and connectors shall be compression type employing a split, corrugated ring and tightening nut. They shall be steel. Cast metal or malleable iron will not be acceptable. Connectors shall be complete with integral bushings and locknuts. Indent or set screw couplings and connectors are not acoeptable.

Flexible metal condujt • flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway. Aluminum will not be allowed. Connectors shall be galvanized steel, screw in grounding type with integral bushing and locknut.

Liquid tight flexible metal conduit - flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway, covered by a liquid tight PVC layer. Connectors shall be galvanized steel, screw in, grounding type which has a ferrule which covers the end of the conduit inside and out.

Plastic conduit - PVC schedule 40 electrical conduit.

Surface metal raceway - Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Sized to accept a minimum of six No. 12 AWG THW wires. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating and hard enamel finish. Color shall be per Architect.

InSUlated conductors shall be as follows:

1339

Branch circuits shall be Class B stranded, copper conductor with type THWN or XHHW Insulation No. 12 AWG minimum diameter. Sizes No. 10 and No. 12 may be solid conductor.

Service and feeder circuits shall be class B stranded, copper conductor with type THWN or XHHW insulation.

3

•

15

16

21

24

27

"

42

45

.6


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 16100 - 2

Line voltage control wiring shall be Class C stranded copper conductor MTW insulated No. 14 AWG minimum diameter.

Connectors lor splicing branch circuits shall be "Scotchlok" insulated spring connectors lor solid conductors; insulated, solid-barrel, crimp type, plated copper alloy connectors lor No. 18 through No.6 AWG stranded conductors; plated copper alloy compression splicing sleeves installed by high compression tools and insulated with heat shrink Raychem sleeves lor No.4 and larger size stranded conductors. Wire splice kits, consisting 01 epoxy resin, hardener, and mold shall be used on splices in outdoor or wet areas .

Connectors lor terminating stranded copper sized No. 18 through No. 10 AWG shall be insulated, solid copper barrel, crimp type, plated copper alloy spade tongue terminal; lor sizes No.8 and larger shall be compression, solid copper barrel, one or two hole lugs installed by high pressure compression tools. Connectors shall be manulactured by T & B, Burndy or Anderson. Terminals shall be suitable for use with seventy-five degree Celsius copper conductors.

Insulating materials shall be "Scotchfill" or equal lor Iii ling bolted or irregular areas belore taping and Scotch No. 33+ 7 mil vinyl plastic tape.

Specialty wire shall be as specilied in the section describing the system It serves.

Grounding conductors shall be bare copper with varnish coat; solid conductor in sizes No.6 and smaller; stranded in No.4 and larger. Grounding rods shall be three-quarter inch by ten loot copperweld.

Supports and anchors shall be galvanized steel in dry areas; stainless steel in wet areas.

Attach enclosures or raceways to buildingfstructure with lag screws or Type A tapping screws lor wood; thru-bolt with fender washers for loads in masonry; molly or toggle bolts for hollow partitions; self drilling anchors with threaded studs for concrete; clamps or U-bolts for structural steel; sell drilling anchors with extension rods for hollow tile over concrete.

Stand enclosure olf wall surface a minirnum of one-quarter inch where enclosures are mounted on walls in wet areas (outdoors, washdown areas, below grade, etc.) with neoprene or plastic shim washers.

Conduit shall be clamped with one hole or beam clamps; rigid steel conduit shall have cast iron hot dipped galvanized clamps; EMT shall be stamped steel, plated or galvanized.

Vibration isolators shall be Korfund, Neldur, or Isomode for floor, pad or trapeze mounted equipment.

Boxes and fittings shall be as follows:

1339

Junction and device boxes for dry locations shall be stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab connections), galvanized with knockouts for conduit or connector entrance.

Junction and device boxes and fittings which are outdoors, below grade, or in wet or damp locations shall be galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum with threaded holes or hubs.

6

•

12

15



Covers for junction boxes and fittings (and those device boxes which do not have device covers) shall be the same material and finish as the boxes to which they are attached. Neoprene gaskets shall be provided for all cast covers and boxes.

Gang boxes shall be used wherever more than one device is used at one location.

Cover plates shall nylon, color to match room finish, smooth surface in finished area with concealed construction, Legrand (TP8 for receptacle covers or TP1 for switch covers) or equal; stamped steel, galvanized in unfinished areas; cast aluminum, Crouse-Hinds OS70G, OS185 in outdoor or below grade areas.

Weatherproof exterior receptacle device covers shall be constructed entirely of cast aluminum material. The cover which encloses the cord set shall be opaque gray. Product shall be INTERMATIC Model WP1010MC or equal.

Enclosures

Enclosures for electrical equipment shall be NEMA 1 for use indoors or NEMA 3R for use outdoors. Enclosures for major equipment items shall be as specified under their respective I. sections.

Indlyldual deylce enclosures for circuit breakers, knife switches, circuit breakers and combination 21 starters shall have external handles marked to indicate "OFF" and "ON" pOsitions. The handle

shall be lockable in the "OFF" or "ON" position. The operating handles shall have a screWdriver defeatable interlock to prevent opening the enclosure door with the device "ON" or closing the

24 device with the enclosure door open. The enclosure door shall be capable of being locked closed.

Provide equipment enclosures with engraved phenolic name plates (white with black background) 27 giving the name and circuit identification of the enclosed device/equipment in one-quarter inch

letters.

30 Protection and control units shall be as follows:

Knife switches shall be heavy dUty and shall meet NEMA Standard KS-1 for heavy duty units. 33 Fusible switches shall be equipped with Class R rejection fuse clips. SWitches used on motor

circuits shall be horsepower rated.

36 Circuit breakers shall meet NEMA Standard AB-1. Main and feeder breakers shall be molded case breakers with thermal magnetic trip, adjustable for magnetic pickup. Branch circuit breakers shali be molded case, thermal-magnetic trip, trip-free with non-interchangeable, non-adjustable

39 trip unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall meet the integrated equipment rating required for the available short circuit current at the eqUipment in which they are used. Series rating of circuit breakers is not permitted.

42

45.

4.

1339

Magnetic motor starters shall meet NEMA Standard ICS-1. They shall be complete with three manual reset overload units of the melting-alloy type and an external reset mechanism shall be provided on the starter enclosure. Starter sizes shall be as stated by NEMA Standard IC8-1. Minimum size shall be NEMA 1. Starters shall be 600 volt rated, three pole with coils rated for the control voltage required by the control system to which they are connected and with centrol power transformers unless otherwise noted. InClude for single speed starters a HANO-OFF-AUTO selector switch and a red run light.

3

•

9



Fuses shall be Bussman "Fusetron" for 600 amperes or less power circuits; Bussman FNQ for control circuits.

Pilot devices shall be NEMA ICS-1 heavy-duty type.

Relays shall have coils suitable for use with control circuit connected to them. The relay contacts shall be rated for the voltage and current for which they will be operating. Relays shall meet NEMA ICS-1 with contacts rated 8300.

Lighting contactors shall be electrically operated, electrically held with coil voltage as noted. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium oxide double break type rated twenty amperes, and shall be

12 field convertible to either normally open or normally Closed. lighting contactors shall be Square D class 8903 type L, or equal,

15 Junction boxes for underground cirCUits shall be in accordance with the Washington Sate Department of Transportation's Standard Plan.

,. Conduit sealant shall be clear or colorless RTV silicone or equal.

21 PART 3 - EXECUTION

24

21

30

42

45

48

51

Raceways

1339

Install electrical metallic tubing and flexible metal conduit for the circuits shown on the Drawings unless other raceways are shown or required by Code. Flexible metal conduit shall be used only at connections to equipment or device enclosures subject to vibration or as "whips" to lighting fixtures in lay-in ceilings. Flexible metal conduit length shall not exceed eighteen inches except at fixtures where "whips" may be up to six feet in length. Flexible conduit shall be installed straight. Do not use flexible conduit in place of fittings or bends.

Underground conduit shall be three-quarter inch minimum trade size. Provide rigid steel elbows for all underground runs Including PVC runs.

Provide rigid steel conduit in wet locations above ground, for conduits run exposed outdoors on the building exterior or for condUits run exposed, above ground on the site.

Raceway shall be provided for each circuit shown on the Drawings. Do not group home runs or circuits without written approval of the Engineer. Raceway shall not be ganged into wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., without specific approval.

Raceway shall not be installed below grade/slab unless specifically shown on the drawings as being installed below grade/slab.

Conceal raceway unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Raceway concealed above ceilings, furred spaces, etc., which are normally inaccessible may be run at angles not parallel to the building lines.

Install exposed raceways in lines parallel to the building or structural members lines. The installation shall not result in crossovers or offsets that can be aVOided by installing the raceway in a different sequence or a uniform line.

•

•

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

3.

42

45

51



1339

Wherever practical. route exposed conduit with adjacent ductwork or piping and support on common racks. Base required strength of racks, hangers, and anchors on combined weights of conduit and piping. Conduit run below slab shall be run in a trench. The top of conduits installed in the shallow trench shall be at least 12 inches below the bottom of the slab. Conduit shall not be run in the slab or just below the slab.

Where raceway exits from grade or concrete. provide the following:

For runs exiting from grade, slabs or encasement, transition to one of the following for a minimum of 24" inches of raceway (including elbows) before exiting and for vertical runs, a minimum of 3" beyond the exiting point:

Rigid Steel Conduit taped with a haH lapped wrap of Scotch rap No. 51 plastic tape (40 mil total thickness). Wrapping must be for the entire portion of Rigid Steel Conduit.

Rigid Steel Conduit coated with Kopper's Bitumastic No. 505. Coating must be for the entire portion of Rigid Steel Conduit.

Do not extend plastic conduit (PVC) above grade, into buildings, or equipment. Install a nylon pull wire in each empty conduit, leaving at least eight Inches slack at each end.

Keep conduits clean and dry and close each end left exposed. When blowing through conduits exposed to the weather, cover electrical components In panels, etc., to avoid blowing dirt, water, etc., into equipment.

Embed raceway in masonry in the hollow core. Horizontal runs in the jOint are not permitted.

Pull a proper size wire brush or swab through each underground and embedded conduit two-inch size and above, followed by a mandrel not less than twelve inches long and apprOximately onequarter inch smaller in diameter than the conduit internal diameter.

CondUit run on eqUipment frames or supports shall closely follow the contours of the equipment. It shall be located to maintain access to all equipment services and adjustment points and so as not to interfere with operation of the eqUipment.

Conduit connections to motors or other equipment shall be supported independently of the motor or equipment. Runs shall rise or drop vertically to the nearest practicable point of connection to the unit. Vertical drops shall be run to the ficor and fastened with a flcor flange. Unsupported drops are not permitted. Horizontal runs on the floor or on equipment are not permitted. Drop or rise at the appropriate closest location.

Cut ends of conduit square with hand or power saw or pipe cutter. Ream cut ends to remove burrs and sharp ends. Threads cut on conduit in the field shall have same effective length and same thread dimensions and taper as specHied for factory-cut threads.

Bending of PVC shall be by hot box bender and, for PVC two inches In diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply PVC adheSive by brUSh.

Make bends and offsets with hickey or power bender, standard elbows, conduit fittings or pull boxes. Run conduit straight and true; make elboWS, offsets and bends uniform and symmetrical.

6

9

15

,.

21

2'

27

36


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 16100·6

Install conduit as a complete, oontinuous system without wires, mechanically secure and electrically connected to all metal boxes, fittings and equipment. Blank off all unused openings, using factory made knockout seals.

Connect conduit to hubless enclosures, cabinets and boxes with double locknuts and with metallic insulating type bushings. Bushings shall be grounding type where connecting to concentric or eccentric knockouts. Connect to enclosures, boxes and devices from below in wet areas. Conduit connections to enclosures shall be made at the nearest practicable point of entry to the enclosure area where the devices are located to which the circuits contained in the conduit will connect.

Support oonduit within three feet of every outlet box, junction box, gutter, panel, fitting, etc.. Do not space supports further apart than ten feet.

Do not bore holes in floor and celilng joists outside center third of member depth or within two feet of bearing points. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum.

The trench for underground raceway runs shall be as straight as practicable. Changes in direction and/or grade shall be of sufficient length to allow a gradual change (three foot radius minimum). The trench shall be true and free from stones or soft spots. Three inches of fine sand shall be placed in the trench bottom and tamped into place. Provide preformed plastic spacers on five foot centers where conduits are stacked vertically. After the raceway is placed In the trench, sand or native earth backfill passing a No.8 sieve, free of stones shall be placed in the trench bottom and tamped around the sides of the conduit. Do not tamp on top of the conduit until the final backfill is placed to finish the grade.

Mark direct buried conduit by a one inch thick concrete ribbon painted red or yellow or a strip of yellow marking tape placed a minimum of twelve inches below grade during backfilling of the trench.

Space electrical rapeways a minimum of 6 inches from steam, hot water, or hot gas piping and from hot air ducts, or other heat sources above normal ambient.

Provide yapor seals in conduit at fire wall penetrations, and where conduits enter or exit buildings from outdoor areas.

In all finished areas the wiring system (raceways) shall be concealed in walls, floors or above ceilings. The Architect's determination of what constitutes a 'finished' area shall be final. If the

39 electrical contractor has any questions regarding finished/unfinished status, he shall obtain clarification and written direction from the Architect prior to starting any work in the subject area .

• 2 Conductors

Install Insulated wire and cable In raceway system after the system is complete. Cable lubricants, 45 pulling sleeves, and pull boxes shall be used to keep pulling tensions within manufacturer

recommended limits.

•• Install circuits continuous without splices from equipment terminal to equipment terminal or motor lead. Branch circuits may be spliced at taps. Do not splice circuits at other locations without written permission from the Engineer.

51

1339

•

•

,.

I. 21

24

.0

33

42

45

4.

"


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 16100 ·7

1339

Conductor connections shall be in accessible boxes. Additional junction boxes shall be Installed as required to meet code or as required to install conductors without physical damage to conductors.

Any conductors showing physical damages shall be replaced by the Contractor •

Color code conductors as follows:

Basic color coding: 208Y/120

Phase volts A Black B Red C Blue Neutral Gray Ground Green

For 3-wire, single phase circuits, use black andlor red with white neutral.

Connect circuit conductors of the same color to the same phase throughout the installation.

Use wire with insulation of required color for conductors of #8 AWG and smaller. For wire larger than No.8 AWG which is not available In specified colors, use self-adhesive, wrap-around cloth type markers of solid colors to code the conductors.

When conductors are marked in this manner, mark each conductor at all accessible locations such as panelboards, junction boxes, pull boxes, auxiliary gutters, outlets, switches, and control centers.

Do not use white or green color for any power, lighting, or control conductor not intended for neutral or grounding purposes. Low voRage control circuits, or 18 AWG or smaller control conductors, may use green or white singly or as part of a trace color in addition to the base color.

Use control wiring of colors different than power wiring or supplied wHh a trace of color in addition to the basic color of the insulation. Use the same color scheme throughout a given system for any control or signal wires performing the same function,

Connect circuit conductors of the same color to the same phase throughout the installation. Viewing all equipment from the front, make connections SO phase color sequence is in the same order as that for panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, etc.

Provide individual neutral conductors for each circuit as shown on the drawings. Common neutral conductors for multi branch circuita are not permitted.

Leave six inches or more of free conductor at each connected outlet (outlet connected to equipment or device) and nine inches of free conductors at each unconnected outlet. Tape free ends of conductors at unconnected outlets and coil neatly in outlet box.

Install wiring to neutral and grounding blocks on the bottom or furthest back row first. Wiring shall leave the blocks accessible for future neutral or grounding connections. Neutral block shall be un bonded except where required by Code. Grounding bars, pads or buses shall be bonded to the enclosure.

3

6

9

12

15

,.

21

24

30

36

39

42

45

48

51

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNrrY COLLEGE STATE PROJECT NO. 2014-226


Install wires neatly in all enclosures. Bend or form wires in neat runs from conduits to terminals. Arrange wires so that they may be grouped by conduit or function in the enclosure. Install cable ties and straps to support and bundle wires in enclosures. Arrange wires to allow wire tags and numbers to be easily read without bending or flexing wiring.

Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding seventytwo inches in length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. Make the grounding conductor connections to motors or equipment ten horsepower and above, or twenty amperes and above, by solderless terminal and a 5/16 inch minimum bolt tapped to the motor frame or equipment housing. Ground connection to smaller motors and equipment may be made by fastening the terminal to a connection box.

Terminate service and feeder circuits with compression indent barrel connectors with one or two hole spade lug ends. Terminate control wiring with indent, insulated spade connectors made especially for the wire size and terminal size on which they are installed and crimped with an approved pliers or tool for the connector.

Service. feeder. and motor branch circuits shall be run in individual conduil. Where several circuits follow a common route, pullboxes or fittings shall be staggered, or if shown grouped in one box, each feeder shall be individually fireproofed. At each connection, except at motors, tag for phase rotation; at motors, tag for winding lead numbers. Make all phase rotation changes for motor direction changes at the motor to maintain correct color phase sequence in equipment.

In each enclosure or box where more than one ungrounded conductor is spliced or connected, tag for panelboard identification and pole number. Mark junction boxes concealed above ceilings with circuit identification using indelible marking pens on the cover.

Pulling Conductors:

Make all cable Pulls by hand. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wirelcable grips, or wrapping extra conductor into an eye, that wi11 not damage cables or raceway.

Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturers recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Install pullboxes where necessary to prevent exceeding manufacturer's recommendations.

Cut cable or conductor ends off after pulling and clean all lubricant andlor pulling compound from conductors before terminating.

Hangers, supports, and anchors

1339

Support raceway, equipment. and devices from framing members or building structure with sufficient clearance for maintenance and service. Provide backing plates, andlor framing material to support equipment, devices and materials which are located between the framing members which are part of the building or facility structure.

Cable supports - provide cable ties and straps for clamping, tying, securing and banding wires and cables in all junction boxes, panelboards and terminal cabinets. Support each circuit independently; group phases of three phase circuits.

3

'2

'5

,.

2,

2.

27

30

3.

3.

42

45

51



Boxes

1339

ConS1ruct lighting standard anchor bases of Portland Cement Concrete - Class B, poured in place in one pour.

Set anchor base forms true to line and grade; hold conduit ends and anchor bolts in proper position and height by means of a temporary pole base template. Grout between the base plate and anchor base after lighting standard assemblies are plumbed.

Bases constructed in sidewalks or slabs shall have the top four inches formed and finished with three-quarter inch chamfer edges and the top shall be finished sidewalk or slab grade. The top four inches shall be separated from adjacent concrete surfaces by means of an expansion joint.

Bases at grade in lawns shall have the top formed with three-quarfer inch chamfer edges; slightly above finished grade; sloped to drain water.

Bases shall have the exposed portion formed and finished with three-quarter inch chamfer edges. From finished grade to four inches below grade the anchor base shall be separated from adjacent concrete surfaces by means of an expansion joint.

Device boxes shall be set plumb, level, square and flush with finished building surfaces within one-sixteenth inch for each condition. Coordinate box locations with building surfaces and finishes to avoid bridging wainscots, joints, finish changes, etc.

Device boxes in finished areas shall be recessed in the wall, floor and ceiling surfaces. Box openings in building surfaces shall be cut within one-eighth inch of boxes and filled tight to box with building materials. Boxes shall be backed with box supports (Caddy Model TSGB, 5GB, steel or wood stud backers or equal) that span studs to prevent rotation on studs or joists and to prevent twisting or deflection during wall, ceiling, or floor surface material installation.

Attach boxes to building structure with a minimum of two fasteners. Attachment shall Withstand a force of one-hundred pounds applied vertically or horizontally.

Set recessed boxes at the height above the floor noted on the Drawings to the bottom of the box, except where noted otherwise; where height is not noted, set boxes for convenience outlet receptacles in finished areas at sixteen inches; for lighting switches, dimmers, etc. at forty-four inches above floor.

Place boxes for outlets on cabinets, countertops, shelves, and similar electrical boxes located above countertops two inches above the finished surface or two inches above the back splash. Verify size, style, and location with the supplier or installer of these items before being installed.

Set exposed device boxes four feet above the finished floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

Set boxes for lighting switches within one foot of the door opening on the strike or lock side of the door or on the side closing last.

Install bonding jumpers and grounding bushings on boxes with concentric knockouts if the knockout ring is bent or loosened.


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 16100 -10

Arrange boxes used in wet areas to drain moisture away from devices or enclosures for 3 equipment and make conduit connections from below.

Install junction boxes for underground raceway systems true to line and grade. The Contractor • shall provide a compacted foundation of fine sand or three-eighths minus crushed rock for the

bearing surface edges of the junction boxes. See details on drawings lor further information.

• Enclosures

12

,.

Mount enclosures for Individual units at fifty-four inches above floors to centerline of controls, etc ..

Attach enclosures. mounted on equipment with machine screws or clamps as required. Do not drill equipment frames or sheets WIThout permission of supplier/manufacturer or the Engineer.

Attach enclosures with a minimum of three fasteners and more if the manufacturer so recommends.

Mount djsconnect (,safety) switches for motors adjacent to the motor they serve. Attach switches to equipment where possible or provide a separate channel support anchored to the building

21 structure or to a foundation. In wet locations, mount switch with all wiring connecting through the bottom of the enclosure.

24 Gille name plates with a thin layer of adhesive and then fasten with self tapping machine screws lightly torqued to avoid distortion of the name plate.

27 Protective devices

1339

Attach a sign giving the size and type of eech fuse to any enclosure containing fuses. Install fuses so that markings or ratings can be read wlti1 the fuse Installed.

Adjust protective devices ratings or settings as required to protect exact equipment furnished.



PART i-GENERAL

ELECTRICAL SERVICE SYSTEM SECTION 16200-1

3 RELATED DOCUMENTS


9

SUMMARY

This section of the Specification covers the electrical service and connection to the commercial power Utility system (Pacific Power) and the work required in conjunction wnh the Utility for their revenue

12 metering.

15

SUMMARY OF WORK

Coordinate with Pacific Power to ensure that their metering and service requirements are met for the electrical service. The Contractor Is responsible for any work necessary to place the service In operation

,. as a complete installation. The Contractor shall provide any materials required and do any work necessary that Is not provided or completed by Pacific Power.

21 The Contractor is responsible for contacting Pacific Power and verifying their service requirements. Where Pacific Power's service requirements are different or In addition to those shown on the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall Include any additional items necessary to complete the service work as

24 part of this bid.

27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Pacific power will provide the primary dip pole, power transformer, primary conductors, current 30 transformers. revenue meter, and secondary conductors to the revenue metering location.

Provide transformer vaults, underground primary pull vaults and sectional1zer vauns per Pacific Power's 33 requirements,

PrOVide current transformer enclosure, meter enclosurebase/socket, sockets and metering wiring as :l6 required by Pacific Power for their revenue metering.

Provide service entrance equipment UL SUSE labeled. Equipment shall be as specified in Sections 39 16100 & 16100 and 16300.

42 PART 3- EXECUTION

45

.. 51

Pacific Power will install the meters and the power transformer.

The Contractor shall provide conduit, excavation and backfill for the Power Company's conductors. Locations shall be as required by the Power Company .

The Contractor shatl install the metering enclosure/socket/socket and associated materials In accordance with the power company's requirements.

1339


ELECTRICAL SERVICE SYSTEM SECTION 16200 - 2

Ground secondary electrical system to the building structure, metallic piping system and supplemental grounding electrodes. Grounding connections made to the water system to be coordinated with the

3 mechanical work and bonding jumpers shall be installed wherever deemed necessary.

6 END OF SECTION 16200

1339


PART 1 - GENERAL

DISTRIBUTION SECTION 16300 -1



•

12

15

,. 21

24

27

30

33

36

39

42

4S

48

51

SUMMARY:

This section of the Specification covers the electrical distribution system, including panelboards and wiring devices

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Circuit Breaker Panelboards

1339

Provide panelboard that meets NEMA Standard PB-1 and UL Standard 67. Breakers shall bolt to the bus. Panel boards shall be twenty inch width. Main breakers shall be vertically mounted. Busing shall be copper. Panelboards enclosures shall be same size and type on multi-section panel boards. Neutrals shall be insulated but bondable. Lugs shall be compression suitable for the size and type of conductor to be connected. Provide full length (floor to bottom of panel) removable skirts for all surface mounted panel boards.

Provide transient voltage surge protection on the main distribution panelboard. TVSS devices shall be integral to the switchboard, shall be part of the listed equipment to meet the requirements of Article 230.71 (A) of the 2014 National Electrical Code and shall be installed by the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer's factory. TVSS devices shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L-N, L-G and N-G in WYE systems. Each mode including N-G shall be fused with a 200kAIR UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal cutout device. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm onfoff switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push to test switch shall be provided.

TVSS devices shall meet or exceed the following criteria: Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be 250kA per phase UL 1449 Suppression Voltage Ratings shall be:

VOLTAGE L-N L-G 208Yf120V 400V 400V

N-G 400V

The TVSS device shall have a minimum EMlfRFI filtering of -50dB at 100kHz with an insertion ratio of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology.

Provide Circuit breakers as scheduled on the "panelboard circuit schedule" located on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be as specified under their respective section. Circuit breakers used for switching shall be listed and labeled for such use.

Panel fronts shall be stretcher leveled steel with piano hinged door to box construction. The entire panel front shall be hinged to allow access to the interior of the panelboard enclosure when opened (the second door allows access to the circuit breakers only). Provide tumbler style locks on both panelboard doors. Panel boards with locks shall be keyed alike. Provide three sets of keys for Owner's use.

•

9


DISTRIBUTION SECTION 16300 ·2

Panelboards shall be manufactured by one of the following and shall be the type noted for the manufacturer in each voltage class:

Manufacturer General Electric Square D Company Cutler-Hammer

Voltage 240 volt or less

A Series NQOD, I-Une Pow-R-Une

Voltage 480 Volt

AD, AE, SCP, Spectra NF,I-Une

Pow-R-Une

All panels shall have a typed circuit directory in glass or claar plastic covered frames.

12 Wiring Devices

Convenience outlet receptacles shall be heavy-duty per UL-498 and Comply with NEMA Standard 15 WD 1 "General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices· and NEMA Standard WD 6, "Wiring

Devices - Dimensional Specifications", duplex, nylon face, provisions for split bus, staked screw terminals for line, neutral, and ground connection, NEMA 5-20R or 5-15R, color to match switches

,. and cover plates (ivory unless other colors are applicable).

Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: UL Standard 943, "Ground Fau~ Circuit 21 Interrupters," with Integral NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect only the connected

receptacle and no other receptacles connected on the same circuit.

24 Ughting switches shall be heavy duty 120-277 volts AC only rated, twenty ampere, ivory, with grounding screw and staked screw terminals for connection.

27

30

42

45

1339

Power poles shall be Vista Service Column as manufactured by Wlremold Legrand.

Classification and Use: Architectural columns shall be suitable for use In dry interior locations only as covered in Article 380 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and shall be ULUsted under File No. E15191.

General: Architectural columns consisting of vertical chase and mu~i-outlet systems to provide a wire path and access point for communications and power. Systems shall consist of modular vertical channels and appropriate fittings as required for a complete assembly. Systems shall include a pre-punched support and aluminum end covers.

Frame: Four-piece design with two center supports with snap-on covers and end caps, providing a total of three useable wire and cable channels. Mill finished 6063-T6 aluminum wllh satin anodized aluminum end caps. Covers and access panels may be painted over and are sullable for field peinting. The aluminum extrusions will be a minimum thickness of 0.06 inch (1.5 mm), and steel covers .040 inch (1.0 mm). The system shall be available in 10 feet 6 inches (3.2 m) height. The system shall be provided with an extension kit that includes aluminum tubes to allow for varying ceiling heights up to 15 feet (4.5 m). Access panels and covers up to a height of 30 inches (762 mm) above finished floor will provide access to wiring and devices. The frame supports shall be available with factory pre-punched hole cuts for communication receptacles and trade knockouts for electrical terminations.

• End Caps: Round. • Material: Snap on aluminum. • Center Panals: Stainless steel. • Adornment: Painted.

3

•

9

12

15

,.

"

"

30

42

45



1339

• Fittings: Provide internal braces with knockouts, snap in dividers and wire clips and ceiling and carpet trim pieces as scheduled or required. Provide snap in divider (VLDIV) below power receptacles for use of lower space by Owner to install communications devices. One of two outside channels shall be designated for use by Owner and shall not contain power cables.

• Provide Add-On plates for receptacles as shown on Plans . • Provide one add-on plate on each column with openings as required by Owner for

Owner-furnished communications devise (i.e. VLRT or device cover as required by Owner). Verify requirements with Owner prior to ordering.

Vista Architectural Column as manufactured by Wiremold. Provide wired receptacle harnesses and appropriate fittings for devices shown on Plans.

• Sizes: 13.4 inches wide by 3.8 inches deep (340 mm by 96.5 mm). • System Height: 10 feet 6 inches (3200 mm).

Frame Model Number: VFL66 2345 CM WH P Center Panel: VF L A3 2345 Device Plate front: VL3D and as required for special receptacles.

Ceiling mounted low vottage ocoupancy sensors shall be passive infrared/ultrasonic dual technology, temperature contrOlled detectors. They shall be equipped with four individual, dual element, passive infrared sensors with overlapping detection patterns. They shall have automatic sensitivity gain, and two LED walk test indicators. The sensor enclosure and circuitry shall be designed to prevent radio and EMF interference. The sensor shall have an adjustable timing delay of 6-15 minutes, with a shunt provision to enable bypass of the sensor in the event of failure. Sensor shall have a minimum five year factory warranty. Sensor shall be Wattstopper or equal. Provide 3 spare units at Substantial Completion.

Stand alone ceiling mounted line voltage occupancy sensors shall be ceiling mounted, passive infrared/ultrasonic dual technology, temperature controlled detectors. The sensor shall have an adjustable timing delay of 6-15 minutes, with a shunt provision to enable bypass of the sensor in the event of failure. Sensor shall have two LED walk test indicators. The sensor enclosure and circuitry shall be designed to prevent radio and EMF interference. Sensor shall have a minimum five year factory warranty. Sensor shall be Wattstopper DT-355 or approved equal. Provide 1 spare unit at Substantial Completion.

Stand alone wall mounted occupancy sensors shall be pessive infrared, with integral switch. Sensor shall have a minimum five year factory warranty. Wattstopper PW-1oo or approved equal. Provide 2 spare units at Substantial Completion.

Cord Reels shall be Industrial duty with 35 foct cable reels. Daniel Woodhead model 1/9385. The device shall be provided with No. 3000-1 portable outlet box with 2 NEMA 5-15 duplex receptacles and a cable stop (Model 9521/22) assembly sized to match cord diameter.

120 volt Duct Smoke Detectors shall be Simplex 4098-9687 with internally mounted 4098-9601 photoelectric detector. Provide 4098-9842 remote control station. Provide sampling tubes sized to accommodate duct to which detector is to monitor, Simplex 4096-96XX series.



Flush floor boxes for recess mounting in floors shall have four compartments for power and communications. The box shall be fully adjustable, made of stamped steel construction. Floor box shall be

3 Wiremold Resource RFB 4 Series or approved equal. Provide floorport activation kit with flooring insert areas and brass finish. Provide mounting hardware as required for installation. Provide two wire grounded 5-20R receptacle (quantity as shown on plans) with internal duplex bracket in floor box. Provide

• communications hardware for connecting Category 6 cables in floorbox (quantity as shown on plans).

• Anchor floor box per manufactuer's recommendations to prevent the box from floating during concrete pour .

Pedestal {tombstone} fittings shall be suitable for two duplex receptacles or two Category 6E data devices. one or two per side. They shall be satin brushed aluminum housing. stainless steel plates. and steel

12 nipple or hubs. Watersaver Faucet, Company E500WS or E600WS series or equal.

,. PART 3· EXECUTION

Protect equipment during construction from moisture, dust, abrasion, or other damage or disfigurement, ,. using plastic sheeting. kraft paper, space heaters, or other appropriate means. Field repair of material or

equipment made defeotive by improper storage is not acceptable.

21 Repair damaged finishes of equipment by retouching or repainting without additional cost to the Owner.

Install se~-supporting equipment in a level and plumb manner, shimming with full width stainless steel 24 shims, as necessary. Units shall be bolted to the floor or pad with three-eighth inch stainless steel

expansion anchors and bolts or welded to embedded steel channels. Floor or pad shall be level within plus or minus one-eighth in a square yard before installing equipment. Grout or caulk enclosure to floor or

27 pad. CondUits entering from above or at the sides shall be bushed. Conduits entering from below shall have grounded insulating bushings bonded to the ground bus or pad.

30 Vacuum equipment clean after installations; remove metal cuttings with a magnet or suitable means before assembling equipment; wipe insulating supports, bushings, etc. with a clean lint-free cloth; clean debris, shavings, etc. from breakers, bus, switches, relays, etc. before start-up.

Remove enclosure knockouts only where conduit or cable entrances are made to the box. If knockouts are incorrectly removed or worked out of position, they shall be plugged with snap-in steel seals equal to

36 RACO 1042 through 1048. Cutting ot enclosure in locations other than necessary to permit conduit entrance will require removal and replacement of the enclosure.

39 The following shall be done as a minimum before energizing equipment:

46

51

1339

Install equipment and perform tests as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and NEMA.

Remove bracing, packing materials, tape on movable parts, etc. as necessary. Check for damage to enclosure or inSUlation.

Assemble all shipping splits. Clean splice piates with Stoddard's Solvent before assembling.

Tighten all bus connections to the recommended torques. Check factory connections for proper Torque.

Tighten all structural connections, barriers, racking mechanisms, etc.; check alignment of piug-in devices with stationary parts; check operating mechanism for binding, lubrication, etc ..

•

•

12

15

21

24

27

33

36

3.

42

45

48


DISTRIBUTION SECTION 16300 - 5

Check continuity and phase uniformity from unit to unit and for all control or metering circuits.

Operate switcheslbreakers/starters.

Panel boards

Install enclosures level and plumb within one-eighth inch overall and, where recessed, flush with wall face within one-sixteenth inch. Provide spacers of neoprene or fiberglass to shim out for surface mounted enclosures on irregular surfaces or damp surfaces. Surface mounted branch Circuit panelboards shall be mounted above the floor using a skirt. It is not acceptable to mount panelboards directly in contact with floors.

Setup, adjust and fasten in place flush trim and interiors.

Install panelboards In such a manner as to leave access to the box, building chases, knockouts, etc. for future circuit additions. Place conduit in the rear line of knockouts where possible. Install spare conduits from flush-mounted panels up to accessible spaces. Install a minimum of one spare three-quarter inch conduit for every three single-pole spare breakers or spaces, or fraction thereof (three conduits minimum).

Knockouts for breaker positions shall not be removed unless a breaker is to be installed. Where twistouts or knockouts are removed in error, provide a circuit breaker (one pole, twenty ampere) to fill each position removed.

Prepare panelboards directories neatly typewritten in the same pole sequence as the panelboard stamping. Send a copy to the Engineer for his racords. Prior to typing the linal directories the Contractor shall verify room and equipment names and numbers with the Owner. Install circuit Breakers and identify as shown on the "Circuit Schedule" for each panelboard. Record drawings shall rellect the actual size and pole pOSition of all breakers, switches or luses installed.

Install circujt breakers and identify as shown on the "Circuit SChedule" for each panelboard. Record drawings shall reflect the actual size and pole pOSition of all breakers, switches or fuses installed.

Wiring devices

1339

Install Wiring devices plumb, level and flush. Provide spacers on device screws to flush yokes or flanges to surface of wall within one-sixteenth inch where recessed boxes are not flush with the wall surface. Tighten screws firmly. Wiring devices such as receptacles shall be supported to withstand fifty pounds force applied perpendicular to the device face without deflection greater than one-sixteenth inch.

Connect phase, neutral and grounding wires to devices with full loops around screws installed to tighten with tightening of screws. Trim insulation to within one-eighth inch of screw terminal.

Install switches with the "Off" position down. Three way or four way switches shall be mounted to have the load "Off" when all switch handles are down.

Install plates on flush-mounted devices so that all four edges are in continuous contact with finished wall surface without the use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted. Install plates with an alignment tolerance of one-sixteenth inch to plumb.

3

6


Use corrosion resistant devices outdoors.

DISTRIBUTION SECTION 16300 - 6

Ground Fault Interrupting devices shall be utilized at all locations within six feet of sinks, and as required by code.


1339


PART 1 - GENERAL

LIGHTING SECTION 16400 -1



9

SUMMARY:

This section of the Specification covers materials for the indoor and outdoor lighting fixtures, lamps and accessory materials such as ballasts, frames, lens, diffusers, hangers, spacers, stems and canopies,

12 auxiliary junction boxes and other miscellaneous hardware as required for complete installation of all lighting equipment as well as coordination of fixture installation with other trades including framing, ductwork, insulation, ceiling, sprinkler and other Contractors.

15

SUMMARY OF WORK:

16 Provide lighting fixtures as listed in the lighting fixture schedule.

Only fixtures which are listed on the Fixture Schedule or which are listed in the Addendum as being prior 21 approved shall be accepted.

24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

There shall be no visible labels, trademarks or monograms on the exterior of the lighting fixtures or on lens 27 or diffusers. Fixtures shall be sealed to prevent light leaks at seams, joints or junctions visible in the

installed condition.

30 Provide gaskets on all trims and housings of exterior or "wet" location fixtures. Non-corrosive type plaster rings, hangers, trim and hardware shall be provided in wet or outdoor locations.

33 Hinged diffuser frames of recessed fluorescent fixtures, intended for finger operation, shall operate easily without use of tools. Latches for frames shall be spring loaded.

36 Plastic diffusing media shall be one-hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic unless specified otherwise, not acrylic plastic. Approved manufacturers: Holophane, KSH Plastics, Carolite Plastics or Plaskolite, Inc. Minimum thickness one-eighth inch. Pattern No. 12 is not acceptable in lieu of KSH K12 prismatic

39 refractors.

LED drivers - electronic integrated circuit, solid-state, full-light-output, energy-efficient type compatible with 42 lamps and lamp combinations to which connected. Certification shall be by Electrical Testing Laboratory

(ETL). Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%. Sound Rating shall be "A" rating. Starting Temperature: -30 deg. C to 50 deg C. Minimum Power Factor: 90 percent. Total Harmonic Distortion

45 (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 10 percent. Drivers shall conform to FCC Regulations Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic interterence. Lamp-Driver connection method shall not reduce normal rated life of lamps.

46

51

Emergency LED drivers shall be 1300 lumen output. Ballasts shall be Bodine BSL 310 or approved equal. Warranty shall be five years.

1339


LIGHTING SECTION 16400 - 2

For fixtures mounted more than eight feet above floor, drivers shall be individually fused by a fast acting, current limiting fuse coordinated with the LED driver operating characteristics, so as to avoid false tripping,

, yet provide fault clearing before damage occurs to the fixture. They shall be Bussman Type HFL in-line fuse holder and Bussman Type GLR fuse, sized at two-hundred percent of the LED driver current rating.

6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

• Coordinate lighting fixture size and design, frame requirements, and hanging or mounting devices for project ceiling conditions before ordering lighting fixtures. Consult the Drawings for details of ceiling and wall construction; provide lighting fixtures suitable for the particular type of ceiling or wall at each location.

12

Adjust light fixtures as required - near piping, equipment, etc., to protect from physical damage and provide sufficient clearance to install lamps and to maintain lens, reflectors, ballasts, etc .. Where pendant

15 mounted fixtures are in conflict with ducts and piping, the Contractor shall coordinate the location and mounting heights of the fixtures to the available space left between the various ducts and piping.

18 The fixtures shall be placed so that doors and other equipment will not damage them at any time.

Adjust stem or chain lengths to suit actual field conditions where mounting heights to bottom of fixtures 21 shown on Drawings are not possible or conflict with other trades work.

Install fixtures with supports, brackets and trim as recommended by the fixture manufacturer to suit the 24 particular building construction and use. Align each fixture to ceiling structure. Fixtures installed in grid

type ceiling with exposed T-bar construction shall have clips to hold fixture to T bars which prevent any relative lateral movement between fixture and the suspension system at any point on the fixture. Provide

27 a minimum of two No.1 0 iron wires per fixture, anchored securely to the supporting grid at each corner of the fixture and to the structural system above. Install surface mounted fixtures tight to the ceiling construction. Provide shims or spacers as required to keep surface mounted fixture from warping or

'0 twisting due to uneven surfaces. For suspended fixtures, use stems and chain attachments that cannot be displaced from hangers by an upward force.

" Fixture hangers and attachments on pendant or bracket mounted fixtures shall be provided in addition to raceway connections. Provide a minimum of two per fixture at the quarter points for fixtures of eight feet or less. Provide a minimum of four per fixture, equally spaced at the ends and on third points for fixtures

'6 over eight feet in length. Provide a minimum of one stem or chain per eight feet plus one for fixtures in a continuous row. Maximum spacing of stems not to exceed nominal length of each fixture. Where more stems or hangers are recommended by the fixture manufacturer, they shall be installed. ,. Fixtures in rows or grids shall be true to line. Fixtures in a common area shall be at the same level or grade. Install continuous runs of fixtures straight and true with joining straps, couplings, and nipples.

42 Spacing for fixtures as dimensioned on the Drawings of the reflected ceiling plan must be maintained and shall not be arbitrarily changed because of ceiling pattern, etc.. Symbols on Drawings which are undimensioned show approximate locations and care shall be used to locate fixtures on centers of

45 spaces, at the quarter points, or as indicated. Any changes in fixture layout must be approved by the Engineer, in writing.

46 Surface and pendant fixtures shall be secured to ceiling system, roof structure or slabs with a fastener such as lag screw, lag bolt, toggle bolt, cinch anchor or stud to support the fixture plus one-hundred pounds at each support. Nails or similar fasteners are not approved for lighting fixture support.

51

1339


LIGHTING SECTION 16400 - 3

Fixtures shall not be supported from ceiling material other than structural or framing material. Provide supports, spacers, channels, etc., necessary to support lighting fixtures where fixtures are located so that

3 they cannot be connected directly to structure members. Provide additional framing to directly support fixtures where construction is such that mounting channels, strongbacks or bridging is required to support fixtures. Material for fixture support shall match the structure material.

G

Every outlet box or other support for lighting fixtures shall be of sufficient strength to support at least four times the weight of fixture or one-hundred pounds, whichever is greater. Support all fixtures weighing

9 more than fifty pounds independently of outlet box. Do not support fluorescent fixtures with forty-eight inches or longer lamps from outlet box ears, Provide suitable fixture stud in box for each fixture, Support all surface mounted fixtures more than eighteen inches wide at or near each corner, in addition to support

12 from outlet box. For heavy pendant mounted fixtures, where support independent of box is required and where conduit and outlet boxes are installed on surface, use safety swivel hanger with fixture stud. For fixtures suspendad indoors from sloping surfaces, provide suitable aligners.

'8

21

Clean fixture lens. diffusers, enclosures on fixtures. Dirty enclosures, lens or diffusers shall be removed, washed and rinsed as recommended by fixture manufacturer.

Drivers that fail before completion of the work shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall verify that polarity, voltage and connections are correct before installing a new driver.


1339


PART 1 - GENERAL

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 16450 -1


The work of this Section applies to the Drawings, Specifications, and as provisions of the Contract. The • General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, and other Division 0 and 1

Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.

• SUMMARY OF WORK:

This section includes work for interior and exterior digital lighting controls including, lighting control .. panels, room and scene controllers, occupancy sensors, and daylightlng sensors.

Provide all materials and labor, including tools for a complete and working system. 15

Related Sections:

,. Sections that are related to this Section include, but are not limited to, the following:

16000 - General Provisions. 21

16100 - Basic Materials and Methods.

24 16300 - Distribution.

16400 - Lighting. 27

SUBMITTALS:

30 General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with conditions of the contract, provide 6 copies.

36

Bill of Materials: Complete list of all parts needed to fully Install selected System components.

product Data: Product Data: Submit product data for specffied products, with indications, when multiple products are shown.

Shop and Wiring Drawjngs: Submit shop drawings detailing all control and lighting equipment, as supplied, including one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, and physical dimensions of each

39 item.

Provide plan drawings and wiring diagrams showing all Internal connections for each room controller in .. each room. This shall include each switching zone and each daylighting zone within each switching zone.

Indicate device location. Indicate device type with a legend that includes part numbers. Show all interconnecting wiring, generic wiring diagrams will be rejected.

Provide programming schedule for each room controller I switch scene.

... Provide a schedule of sensor settings based upon room type and ocoupancy configuration. Show that sensor is suitable for the proposed application.

51 Provide switch engraving schedule for each switch.

Provide itemized parts list and quantitles.

1339

3

6

9

12

15


Closeout Submittals:

Manufacturer's installation instructions.

Warranty documents specified herein.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 16450 - 2

Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be one who is experienced in performing the work of this section, and who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

Manufacturer Requirements: The manufacturer shall be experienced in the manufacture of commercial lighting controls and shall provide phone support by qualified applications engineers.

ISO Certification: Manufacturer shall be ISO-9000 certified.

18 Performance Testing Requirements:

21

24

27

30

Manufacturer shall 100% test all equipment prior to shipment. Sample testing is not acceptable.

Code Requirements:

All System components shall be UL listed and CSA/cUL certified, where applicable.

All System components shall be FCC compliant, where applicable.

All System components shall be installed in compliance with national electrical codes, where applicable.

Building Codes: All units shall be installed in compliance with applicable, local building codes.

33 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:

Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid 36 construction delays.

Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged packages with intact 39 identification labels.

Storage and Protection: Store materials away from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at 42 temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

45

4B

WARRANTY:

Manufacturer's Warranty: All equipment shall be warranted free of defects in materials and workmanship.

1339

Warranty Period: Excluding ballasts, all System components shall be warranted for at least three years from date of purchase.

Owner Rights: Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under contract documents, or warranties of third party component manufacturers.


3 PART:1 - PRODUCTS

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

•


Controls: Wattstopper and Wattstopper Digital Lighting Management (DLM)

9 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:

ROOM CONTROLLERS:

Room controllers shall automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load

15 and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features:

Ie Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.

21 Simple replacement - using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.

24 Device status leds to indicate: Data transmission Device has power

27 Status for each load Configuration status

30 Installation features including: Standard junction box mounting Low voitage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable

Plenum rated

Manual override and led indication for each load

Dual voltage (1201277 vac, 60 hz)

Zero cross circuitry for each load •

.., Onloff room controllers shall include:

48

. ,

1339

One or two 20A relay configuration

Efficient 150 ma switching power supply Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports

Discrete mOdel listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space .

One relay configuration only Automatic-on/off configuration

6

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30


Wattstopper product numbers: LMRC-1 01, LMRC-102

On/off/dimming enhanced room controllers shall include:

Real time current monitoring

One, two or three 20A relay configuration

Efficient 250 ma switching power supply

Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 16450-4

One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and led drivers.

The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

Establish preset level for each load from 0-100% Set high and low trim for each load Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours (for flourescent loads only)

Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space.

One relay configuration only Automatic-on/off configuration

Wattstopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213,.

Provide (3) Spares of each type at substantial completion.

DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES:

33 Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 5 button configuration; available in white; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall sWitches shall include the following features:

36 Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.

Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttors and/or alternate color buttons. 39 Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

Each switch shall have engraved buttons for each scene. 42

Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

45 Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:

Bi-Ievel LED 48

Dim locator level indicates power to switch

51 Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

Dimming switches shall include seven bi-Ievel LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.

1339

•

•

s

,.


Two RJ·45 ports for connection to DlM local network .

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 16450 • 5

Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by connecting them to the free topology DlM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching .

The following SWitch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from load to Scene. and vice versa).

Individual button function may be configured to Toggle. On only or Off only.

Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

21 Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

24 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS:

Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR). ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company's system which

27 accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled. utilizing room controllers. digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.

30 Provide dual technology for each space.

33

42

1339

Digital Occupancy Sensors shali provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:

Sensitivity - 0-1 00% in 10% increments

Time delay - 1·30 minutes in 1 minute increments

Test mode - Five second time delay

Detection technology - PIR. Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or reactivation.

Walk-through mode

Load parameters Including AutolManual-ON, blink warning. and daylight enable/disable when photo sensors are included in the DlM local network.

One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DlM local network.

3

6

•

12



Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.

Device Status LEOs including:

PIR Detection

Ultrasonic detection

Configuration mode

Load binding

Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools .

Manual override of controlled loads.

Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by connecting them to the free topology DLM local network, No additional configuration will be required.

WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC.

IS Provide (3) Spares of each type at substantial completion.

I.

24

27

30

33

DIGITAL PHOTOSENSOR (DAYLIGHT):

1339

Digital photosensors shall work with room controllers to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable ot controlling up to three lighting zones.

DioUal photosensors include the following features:

An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum. and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.

Sensor light level range shall be from 1-10,000 footcandles (fe).

The oapability of switching one-third, one-half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s} and load binding to room controller(s}.

For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a deadband or a separation between the "ON Setpoinf' and the ''OFF Setpoinf' that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off.

3

6

9

,.

,.

,.

24

21

30

36



For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of tuming lights off or dimming lights to a userselectable minimum level.

Optional programmable wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, If permitted by system administrator, raise and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of occupancy.

Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.

Red configuration LED that blinks to Indicate data transmission.

Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.

Recessed test switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.

One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.

An adjustable head and a mounting bracket to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensor may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox.

Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features:

An internal photodlode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.

Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.

A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a "Setpoint" to be maintained during operation.

WattStQPper prodyct Nymber: LMLS-500. Provide (2) spares at substantial completion.

CONFIGURATION TOOLS:

1339

A oonfiguratlon tool facilitates optional customlzation of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless oonfiguration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.

Features and functjonailly of the wjreless configuration tool shall include:

Two-way Infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.

High visibility organic LED (OLEO) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation.

Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches.

6


LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 16450·8

Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.

Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s)on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting.

Adjust or fine·tune daylightlng settings established during auto-commissioning, and Input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls.

WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100.

Provide (2) handheld LMCT-100.


12

PREINSTALLATION TRAINING:

Prior to installation (post submittals), the manufacturer shall provide an on-site training session for the Contractor. This is mandatory for the Contractor to attend, but should be set up as the Contractor's

IS schedule permits. Notify Engineer, two weeks prior to training scheduled date.

" PREPARATION:

Site Verificetion: Verify that wiring conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections or at a previous time, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's

., instructions.

Inspection: Inspect all material included in this contract prior to installation. Manufacturer shall be notified 24 of unacceptable material prior to installation.

INSTALLATION:

The Contractor, as part of the work of this section, shall coordinate, receive, mount, connect, and place into operation all equipment. The Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wire, connectors, hardware, and

30 other incidental items necessary for properly functioning lighting control as described herein and shown on the plans. The Contractor shall maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.

33

Compliance: Contractor shall comply wah manufacturer's product data, including shop drawings, technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for

36 installation.

Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise 39 indicated.

Contractor shall program each controller, switch, occupancy sensor, daylighting sensor; for each space. 42 5-button switches shall be programmed with 4 scenes each.

Conferepce Room and Muster Room:

46 Scene 1 - Whole room at 100%. [100%]

Scene 2 - Whole room at 75% dim. Scene 3 - Whole room at 50% dim. [50%]

1339

3

6

9

CAMPUS OPERATIONS COMPLEX YAKIMA VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE STATe PROJeCT NO. 2014-226

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 16450 • 9

Scene 4 - Zone 'b' (front of room) full dim, or OFF, and zone 'a' (back of room) 25% dim. [Projector]

The ON/OFF button shall turn fixtures ON and OFF, no matter the current scene.

Offices and Security Office:

Scene 1- Whole Office at 100%. [100%]

Scene 2 - Whole Office at 75% dim. [Energy Mode]

Scene 3 - Whole Office at 50"k dim. [50"k]

Scene 4 • Whole Office at 25% dim. [25%]

The ONIOFF button shall turn fixtures ON and OFF, no matter the current scene.

OCCUPANCY SENSORS:

12 Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations.

15 Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s).

" The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic, use tables, installation conditions, and manufacturer's recommendations to finalize locations.

Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy 21 savings.

24

27

30

33

Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after occupant leaves area.

Adjust time delay so that controlled area non-partitioned spaces such as restrooms remains lighted for 20 minutes after oocupant leaves area.

Upon completion of the installation, verify adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a troublefree occupancy-based lighting control system.

Power: The Contractor shall test that all branch load circuits are operational before connecting loads to sensor system load terminals, and then de·energize all circuits before installation.

Contractor shall protect Installed product and finished surfaces from damage during all phases of installation including preparation, testing, and cleanup.

TESTING I COMMISSIONING:

36 Upon completion of the installation. and three weeks prior to substantial or phase completion, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized representative who will verify a complete fully functional system. Written notification should be given two weeks prior to commissioning date for

3. adequate notice.

1339



System shall be commissioned in front of the Owner and the Engineer. Notify the Architect and Engineer 3 weeks prior to substantial completion to set up a testing/commissioning meeting.

3

TRAINING:

6 Provide a factory technician for on-site training of the owners' representatives and maintenance personnel. Coordinate timing with Contractor. Provide 1 day of factory on-site training.

9 SERVICE AND SUPPORT:

Telephone factory support shall be available at no additional cost to the Contractor or Owner both during ,. and after the warranty period. Factory to pre-program the lighting control system per plans and approved

submit1al, to the extent data is available. The specified manufacturer, at no added cost, shall provide additional remote programming via modem as required by the Contractor or Owner for the operational life

15 of the system. Upon request manufacturer to provide remote dial up software at no added cost to system owner. No exceptions.

18 CLEANING:

Clean all panel interiors. 21

Clean occupancy and daylighting sensors.

24 Clean phofocelilens as recommended by manufacturer.

Clean all switch faceplates. 27


1339


PART 1 - GENERAL

DOOR ACCESS SYSTEM SECTION 16790 - 1

3 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division·1 Specification sections of the Contract, • apply to the work of this section.

9

12

SUMMARY:

This section 01 the Specification covers materials lor devices for new door access system for the Campus Operations Office Building.

SUMMARY OF WORK:

,. Provide a door access system including door stations wHh keypads!proxlmHy readers, connections to door locks, intelligent systems controller, power supplies, reader interface modules and additional components required to make the system operational. Devices shall be provided at the locations shown

,. on the drawings.

Intelligent systems controller shall be located in the main telecommunications room. The controller shall ., Inolude an Ethemet Interface to be connected to the campus LAN using a model SNIB2 interface card.

Coordinate IP address for SNIB2 with the YVCC network administrator

.4 The access controliers shall be Interface to the existing campus Hlrsch·ldentive Velocity server. The installing Contractor shall assist with connecting the controller(s) to the Velocity server. Once connected the installing Contractor shall utilize an employee certified on Hlrsch-Identive Velocity to configure the

21 hardware of all devices installed, create a Status Viewer group for the building to include all installed devices, and designate a door group for testing of the system. Campus Security will assist in assigning a test credential for use during commissioning and testing of the system.

30

33

Provide cabling and miscellaneous eqUipment required for a complete and operable system which complies with applicable codes and standards in effect at the job site.

The system manufacturer shall be Hirsch·ldentive.

38 The system shall be totally self·contalned and require 120 volt control power at the power supply locations only. All controllers will be installed in compliance with Class 2 electrical standards,

"" System wiring requirements, where different than those shown on the Drawings shall be provided to the Engineer for review and to all Contractors for Information prior to bidding. Costs of wiring the system shall be included in the Contract when they are in excess of that shown on the Drawings.

42

45

The Contractor shall provide shop drawing submittal information for review by the Engineer before the equipment Is delivered to the job site or conduit installation has begun as follows:

Provide wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiatfng clearly between factory- and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for the system with all terminals and interconnections

4. Identified. Make all diagrams specific to this Project and distinguish between field and factory wiring.

Indicate final device locations and routings of raceway connections on floor plan drawings. Wire types 51 shall be indicated for all field wiring along with a wire type legend. All wiring shall conform to

manufacturer's recommendations as outlined in the Hirsch-Identive Dig/track Design 8< InstaHatlon Guide.

1339


DOOR ACCESS SYSTEM SECTION 16790 • 2

Provide maintenance data for the door access system to include In the operation and maintenance manual. Include data for each type of product, Including all features. Include recommendations for spare

, parts to be stocked at the site. Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished. Include a statement of warranty for the Installed system with all contact information for service and warranty requests. ,

•

Provide one (1) electronic copy of the O&M information, including any start·up instructions and checklists, to the Commissioning Authority at time of submittal.

Provide an elementarv, connection or Interconnection wiring diagram showing the connection of each device In the system. All wires shall be individually numbered with the actual wire designation to be used

12 in the field.

Provide product Data for each type of system component specified including dimensioned plans and 15 elevations showing minimum clearances and installed features and devices. Include list of materials.

" PART 2 • PRODUCTS

The materials for the raceway system for the door access system shall consist of conduit, boxes/fittings, 21 hangers/supports, and other raceway accessories as specified under Section 16050 of the specification.

24

The materials for hangers and supports shall be the same for this system as for the general wiring system. .

Wire and cable shall conform to the Hirsch-Identive Digitrack Design & Installation Guide. Conductors shall be provided and sized appropriately. At a minimum the following guidelines will be used per device

27 type:

• Readers or keypads shall be six conductor No. 22 shielded cable with outer PVC jacket or as '0 shown on the drawings.

• Input devices such as door position switches, motion sensors, tamper devices, or auxiliary Inputs shall be four conductor No. 22 shielded cable with outer PVC jacket or as shown on the

" drawings.

"

• Strike or door hardware control shall be four conductor No. 18 non-shielded cable with outer PVC jacket or as shown on the drawings.

Cables shall be plenum rated.

,. Wire markers shall be industrial printed style with indelibly stamped block letters and numbers sized to fit outer diameter of wire or cable and shall utilize an adhesive to connect to the cable.

42 The control panel shall be a Hirsch-Identive M8N2 with quantity of MRIB appropriate for quantity of door stations shown on the drawings. The CCM firmware will be the most current revision and shall be at a minimum version 7.4.58.

45

Power supplies shall be Life Safety Power FP series power supplies sized to serve the loads shown on the drawings. Provide 12 volt or 24 volt power supplies to match requirements of door strikes and

4B interlace modules. A minimum of 3 amps at 24 volts per access control door shall be provided. C4P or C8P modules shall be included so that each door will receive its own output. D8P modules shall be Included so that each powered RTE or sensor device will receive Its own output. Housings shall be sized

51 appropriately to include all modules and back-up batteries and shall be size E2 minimum. Batteries shall provide 7 AH minimum battery back-up capacity.

1339

,


DOOR ACCESS SYSTEM SECTION 16790 - 3

Proximity readers shall be Hirsch-Identive model CR24L. All readers shall be mounted using a single gang back-box. Provide black color or as designated by Architect.

Door position switches shall be flush mount 'Au diameter UTC model 1078CN. Holes will be placed in the door frame prior to pre-wire of the door position switches. Magnets shall be permanently attached to the

• door in alignment with the door position switch.

Input modules shall be Hirsch-Identive model MELM-2 or DTLM-2. Any unused leads of the MELM-2 • shall be insulated against accidental contact with conductors.


Install door access system in raceway and boxes and using D rings as specified under Section 16050 15 Basic Materials and Methods and as shown on the drawings.

Provide devices and equipment at the locations designated on the drawings. Provide back boxes or 18 conduit boxes for all devices. Boxes shall be mounted plumb, level, square and flush with building

surfaces within one-sixteenth inch for each condition. Box openings in building surfaces shall be cut within one-eighth inch of boxes, and filled tight to box with building materials. The devices shall be at

21 uniform mounting heights and be of a uniform type and appearance in common applications throughout the building.

24 Provide cabling as required for the system. All cable runs shall be point to point without splices unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Where a circuit is designated on a drawing, the wiring shall consist of the cable shown on the drawings connecting the interface module to the proximity reader or door lock and

27 from the interface module to the systems controller or power supply.

If field located junction boxes/housings are utilized for equipment in support of the access control doors '0 such as MRIB or MELM devices, these junction boxes/housings shall be located on the secure side of the

door. When possible these junction/boxes/housings shall be located above the drop ceiling in an accessible location.

" ,.

,.

42

Cable shall be identified by unique tagging at each end of the cable. Tagging shall consist of slip-on neoprene wire markers with the extension number or other unique coding number installed.

Test all cables after installation for open, shorts, or grounds. Replace defective cable and retest until all cabling is satisfactory.

Contractor and manufacturer's representative shall fully test and demonstrate the proper operation of the system to the Owner and Engineer prior to Owner acceptance.

Provide 4 hours of training by the manufacturer's representative to the Owner. Provide a summary of the content of training to be provided and the publications to be used. Include a training schedule and

45 coordinate training with the Owner and Engineer.

During all training sessions, a training sign-in sheet, listing all attendees including contractors and 48 vendors, shall be utilized. A copy of the training sign-in sheet, with date, shall be submitted to the

Architect and Owner.

51

1339


PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

DOOR ACCESS SYSTEM SECTION 16190 ·4

3 The Installing contractor will be an authorized distributor of Hlrsch-Identive with at least ten (10) years experience as a Hirsch-Identive distributor. The installing contractor shall demonstrate previous experience Installing Hirsch-Identive in a higher education environment with references. , The project designer and foreman for the project shall be certified for Velocity installations by Hirsch· Identive. The project foreman for the project shall be certified for Digi-Track Installations by Hirsch-

• Identive and all installation technicians provided on site by the Installing contractor shall have previous experience with Hlrsch-Identlve Installations. A resume for the project designer end foreman shall be submitted demonstrating at least five (5) years previous experience with Hlrsch-Identlve Installations and

12 confirming that both Individuals are employees of the Installing contractor.

The Installer shall utilize a live person answering service in a hardened facility for service requests when 15 the primary office is unavailable and have the abil~y to dispatch a qualffied service techniCian for on-site

or remote support 24f7.

,. END OF SECTION 16190

1339